JP6535303B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a start condition, and generates a state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result.

  Among conventional gaming machines, one having a movable effect device for producing a game by operation is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-73326 A

  The effect by the operation of the movable effect device is preset at a predetermined timing such as the start of the variable display game, and the operation is performed according to this setting, but if the movable effect device does not operate normally due to some reason , It is not possible to perform the scheduled operation, which will affect the production. The object of the present invention is to cope with defects properly.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is:
In a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a start condition, and the game results in a special result when the game results in a special result,
A plurality of movable effect member for directing the game by operating,
Providing effect control means for controlling the movable effect member ;
The plurality of movable effect members include a first movable effect member, a second movable effect member, and a third movable effect member.
The first movable effect member and the second movable effect member can operate at the same time,
The second movable effect member and the third movable effect member can operate at the same time,
When the first movable effect member is at the first predetermined position and the third movable effect member is at the second predetermined position, the first movable effect member and the third movable effect member interfere with each other And
The effect control means is
In the effect of simultaneously operating the second movable effect member and the third movable effect member after the first movable effect member performs a predetermined operation,
If the first movable effect member does not exist at the initial position at the timing when the second movable effect member and the third movable effect member start operating, the second movable effect member is caused to start operating as scheduled The operation start of the third movable effect member is delayed until the first movable effect member moves to a position where the first movable effect member does not interfere with the third movable effect member .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to cope with problems properly.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an expansion explanatory view showing the details of a collective display. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flow chart explaining timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining input processing. It is a flow chart explaining switch reading processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payment command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fraud & prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flow chart explaining game machine state check processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payment busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure starting opening switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining special processing usual processing. It is a flow chart explaining special processing usual processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining special drawing information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining change start information setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting process (special figure 1) during special figure fluctuation. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing (special figure 2) during special figure fluctuation. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing during a special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. It is a flow chart explaining high probability change frequency number update processing. It is a flowchart explaining a production mode information check process. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a process transfer setting process 1 during fan fare / interval. FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting process 1; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during special winning opening open. It is a flow chart explaining processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flow chart explaining big winning a prize mouth residual ball processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a process transfer setting process 2 during fan fare / interval. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting processing 2. FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating special processing ordinary processing shift setting processing 2; (A) is a flowchart explaining the small hit fanfare medium process, (b) is a flowchart explaining the small hit medium process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit middle process. It is a flowchart explaining small hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing. (A) is a flowchart explaining small hit residual ball processing, (b) is a flow chart explaining small hitting end processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining small hit end processing. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating special processing ordinary processing shift setting processing 3; It is a flowchart explaining a production | presentation command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining symbol change control processing. It is a flowchart explaining distribution processing. It is a flowchart explaining 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining common drawing game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a Fuden prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a common drawing usual processing. FIG. 17 is a flowchart for explaining a general-purpose process shift setting process 1; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the processing transfer setting processing during common drawing fluctuation. (A) is a flowchart explaining the processing during the common drawing fluctuation, (b) is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing during the common drawing display. It is a flowchart explaining a process in common drawing display. It is a flowchart explaining a process transfer setting process during a common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining a power transmission operation shift setting process. (A) is a flow chart for explaining the routine electric bulb remaining ball processing, (b) is a flow chart for explaining the end processing shift setting process per common drawing. (A) is a flow chart for explaining the end processing per common drawing, (b) is a flow chart for explaining the common processing shift processing 2 for common processing. It is a flowchart explaining segment LED edit processing. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a pending | holding indicator, and the content of a pending | holding display table. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining starting opening signal editing processing. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a display during change. It is a figure explaining the modification of a special figure 1 change display. It is a figure explaining the modification of a special figure 1 change display. It is a figure explaining the modification of a package display. It is a figure explaining the modification of the special figure 1 in-varying display, and a common-diagram changing display. It is a figure explaining the modification of a special figure 1 change display. It is a figure explaining the modification of a package display. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in a production control device. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining pre-reading symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining pre-reading change system command processing. It is a figure explaining a specific presentation information storage area. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining change production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining the first half notice setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 reservation information setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 reservation information setting processing. It is a figure explaining the decoration display in case the number of starting memory increases. It is a figure explaining the decoration display in case the number of starting memory decreases. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of specific effect. It is a figure explaining the content of the specific effect information storage area. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of specific effect. It is a figure explaining the content of the specific effect information storage area. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation mode of a board production device. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation mode of a board production device. It is a flowchart explaining movable body control processing processing. It is a flow chart explaining waiting setting processing. It is a figure explaining the structure and display mode of a sub information display apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a sub information display apparatus control process. It is a flow chart explaining segment LED edit processing in the 1st modification. It is a flow chart explaining display delay processing in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining change of the number of starting memory in a 1st modification, and change of a display. It is a figure explaining change of the number of starting memory in a 1st modification, and change of a display. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 reservation information setting process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 reservation information setting process in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the update of the decoration special figure starting memory display in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining change of the number of starting memory in a 3rd modification, and change of a display. It is a figure explaining change of the number of starting memory in a 3rd modification, and change of a display. It is a figure explaining change of the number of starting memory in a 3rd modification, and change of a display. It is a figure explaining the specific performance information storage area in a 4th modification.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are internally incorporated on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration or effect, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a delivery abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. has an abnormality notification color (for example, red , And a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting a sound (for example, a sound effect). Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a lamp for notifying a dispensing abnormality may be provided on a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (reserved plate) for supplying gaming balls to a bat firing device (not shown) and gaming balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 There are provided an upper flat ball outlet 22 which flows out, a lower tray (a tray) 23 for storing gaming balls dispensed in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a hitting launch device, and the like. Further, at the upper edge portion of the upper tray 21, a presentation button 25 incorporating a presentation button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25 A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Also, to the right of the effect button 25, the ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball loan from the adjacent ball lending machine, and the discharge button operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device is supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming ball 32 toward the gaming area 32 on the front of the gaming board 30. To fire. In addition, the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to perform an operation or the like in which the player operates in the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41 and to project forward than the display surface of the display device 41 to make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (brown tube). In the area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character producing a special view variation display game, a background image enhancing a rendering effect, etc. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variable display), and a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game is performed. In addition, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, and the like) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 forming a movable effect device for producing effects of a game including a special view variation display game by the movable effect member operating. As the board effect apparatus 44, a first board effect apparatus 44a is provided below the center case 40. The first board effect device 44a is provided with a movable effect member having a hexagonal column shape, is operable upward from the initial position shown in FIG. 2, and can operate in a range indicated by a broken line. Further, a second board effect device 44 b is provided on the left and right portions of the center case 40 as the board effect device 44. The second board effect device 44b includes a plate-like movable effect member, is operable from the initial position shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41, and can operate within the range indicated by a broken line. In addition, a third board effect device 44 c is provided on the top of the center case 40 as the board effect device 44. The third board effect device 44c is provided with a circular movable effect member, is operable downward from the initial position shown in FIG. 2, and can operate within the range indicated by a dotted line.

  Here, the first board rendering device 44a and the third board rendering device 44c overlap with each other in a part of the operation range in the vicinity of the central portion of the display device and interfere with each other. . Further, since the second board rendering device 44 b does not overlap with the other board rendering device 44 without interfering with the other board rendering device 44, the second board rendering device 44 b does not collide even if it operates simultaneously with the other board rendering device 44.

  In the lower left portion of the center case 40, a sub-display for displaying a fourth symbol to execute the decorative special view variable display game separately from the decorative special view variable display game displayed on the display device 41 and displaying the number of starting memories An information display device 90 is provided.

  The sub information display device 90 is configured by a single light emitting unit forming a sub game display unit for displaying a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special view variable display game corresponding to the first special view variable display game. A second sub formed of a sub game display portion 91 and a single light emitting portion forming a sub game display portion for displaying a fourth pattern for executing the decorative special view variable display game corresponding to the second special view variable display game And a game display unit 92. Furthermore, a first sub-display unit 93 indicating the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special view variation display game by two light emitting units, and a second special view variation display game by two light emission units And a second sub display unit 94 indicating the number of second start memories, which is the right to do.

  In the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92, a display indicating that the corresponding special view variation display game is being displayed in a variable manner, and a display indicating the result are extinguished, blinked, or lit of the light emitting unit Can be displayed. In addition, the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94 have the numbers of the first start storage (special figure 1 suspension) and the second start storage (special figure 2 suspension) turned off of the two light emitting units, respectively. It can be displayed by blinking or lighting.

  By providing the sub information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the fourth symbol is displayed on the display device 41 without occupying the display region of the display device 41, and the display region is effectively utilized. be able to. The sub information display device 90 is provided outside the operation range of the first board rendering device 44a, the second board rendering device 44b, and the third board rendering device 44c, and the sub information display device 90 is in the process of operating these. It is made that it is not covered.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common view start gate, inflow area) 34 for giving a start condition of the common view variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the common drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 4).
Further, three general winning openings 35 are disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning area is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the common view starting gate A mouth 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 4).

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (a first start winning opening, a start winning area, and an inflow area) for providing a start condition of the first special view variation display game is provided. The game ball having won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 4).

Further, immediately below the start winning opening 36, a normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second start winning opening, start winning area, inflow area) for providing a start condition of the second special view fluctuation display game is provided.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened to allow the game ball to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side, and the movable member 37b is always A closed closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) to which the game ball can not flow is maintained. Then, when the result of the common drawing variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the game ball easily flows into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the common power solenoid 37c (see FIG. 4) as a drive device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 4). In addition, it is possible to be able to win even when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the closed state, and in the closed state, it may be possible to win rather than the open state.
In addition, below the normal fluctuation winning device 37, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a prize.

Furthermore, a special variation that can be converted into a non-accepting state and an easy-accepting state according to the result of the special view variation display game on the lower side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32 and to the right of the start winning opening 36. A winning device (big winning opening) 38 is disposed.
The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game The state of closing the big winning opening (blocked state which is disadvantageous for the player) is converted into the opened state (which is advantageous for the player). That is, the special variation winning device 38 has, for example, a special winning opening which is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 4) as a drive device. During the state, the game ball is made easy to flow into the big winning hole by converting the big winning hole from the closed state to the open state, and the player is given a predetermined gaming value (prize ball). It has become. In the inside of the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 4) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening. . In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the gaming balls having flowed into the large winning openings are detected by any of the large winning openings switches 38a. As described above, by providing a plurality of large winning opening switch 38a, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball flowing into the large winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is taken as the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is taken as the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the power and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike) to aim for winning in the start winning opening 36 and fires the game ball to the right side game area (so-called It is possible to aim for winning in the common drawing starting gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special fluctuation winning device 38 by right-handing.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right gaming area, and is discharged to the right gaming area. The gaming ball thus formed is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. In addition, since the material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is made of a material that allows the game balls passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visible from the outside, The game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, the game ball flowing down the right play area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42 .

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game and the common view start gate 34 making the special view change display game. A collective display device 50 is provided which displays a common drawing variation display game triggered by winning and various information.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the batch display device 50 has a configuration in which a plurality of light emitting units including LEDs as light emitting sources are arranged in a matrix, and the light emitting units can independently set the lighting mode. Also, the player can visually recognize the lighting mode of each light emitting unit. In the diagram for explaining the collective display device 50, the symbols D1 to D32 displayed on the respective light emitting parts and the broken lines surrounding the luminous parts are displayed for the sake of explanation and are not displayed on the actual collective display device 50. . Further, the light source is not limited to the LED but may be a lamp. Furthermore, each light emitting unit may be configured by a liquid crystal display device, an EL display device, or the like.

  A special view 1 display 51 (D1 to D8) for displaying a first special view variation display game and a special view 2 display 52 for displaying a second special view variation display game (D17 to D26) are displayed on the collective display device 50. And a common drawing indicator 53 (D27 to D30) for displaying a common drawing variation display game. In addition, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 54 (D9, D10) which shows the number of the 1st starting memory which is the right to execute the 1st special figure fluctuation indicatory game, the second which is the right to execute the 2nd special figure fluctuation indicatory game 2 special display 2 reserve display 55 (D11, D12) showing the number of start storage, common view reserve display 56 (D31, D32) showing the number of common view start storage which is the right to execute the common view variation display game Is provided.

  Furthermore, a first gaming status display unit (first gaming status indicator, right strike notification unit) 57 (D13) that informs the collective display device 50 that the game state is more advantageous to hit the right than to hit the left. ), The second game status display unit (second game status indicator, time saving status indicator) 58 (D14) that lights up when time saving status occurs and reports time saving status, the number of rounds at big hit (special variation winning device) A round display unit 60 (D15, D16) for displaying the number of opening and closing 38) is provided. The collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies of the occurrence of the big hit. In addition, a third gaming state display unit (third gaming state) displays that the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, at a position where the player can visually recognize on the gaming board 30 Although the display unit and the probability state display unit are provided, they may be provided in the collective display device 50.

  In the special figure 1 display 51, during the variation time of the first special figure variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display is repeatedly performed in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. Then, when the variation time of the first special view variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (resulting mode) corresponding to the result of the first special view variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 1 in-motion display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result aspect form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the first special figure variation display game.

  In the special figure 2 display 52, during the variation time of the second special figure variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display is repeatedly performed in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. Then, when the variation time of the second special view variation display game is ended, the lighting pattern (resulting mode) corresponding to the result of the second special view variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns to be displayed in the special figure 2 fluctuating display and the lighting pattern to be displayed as a result aspect form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the second special figure variation display game.

In the common drawing indicator 53, during the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing fluctuation display is repeatedly performed in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. Then, when the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game ends, the lighting pattern (resulting aspect) according to the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns to be displayed in the general drawing fluctuating display and the lighting pattern to be displayed as a result aspect form identification information (common drawing, normal symbol) for displaying the common drawing fluctuation display game.
The details of the special figure 1 display on the special view 1 display 51, the special view 2 display on the special view 2 display 52, and the display on the common view display 53 will be described later.

  The special view 1 suspension display 54 displays the number of first start memories (first suspension number), which is the right to execute the first special view variation display game, by turning off, flashing, or lighting the plurality of light emitting units. The special view 2 reserve display 55 displays the number of the second start storage (second reserve number), which is the right to execute the second special view variation display game, by turning off, blinking, or lighting the plurality of light emitting units. The common drawing reserve display 56 displays the number of common drawing start memories (the number of common drawing reservations) which is the right to execute the common drawing variation display game by turning off, blinking and lighting the plurality of light emitting parts.

  The first gaming state display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 turns off the lamp when the game state in which the left-handed game is more advantageous for the player than the right-handed game (normally hit), and turns the lamp off. If the player is in the game state advantageous to the player (right strike), the lamp is turned on.

  In the case of the normal gaming state where the time saving state is not occurring (when the fluctuation time shortening function is not activated), the second gaming state display unit (time shortening state notifying unit) 58 turns off the lamp and the time saving state occurs. If it is (when the fluctuation time reduction function is activated), the lamp is turned on.

  The round display unit 60 turns off all the light emitting units when not in the special game state, and sets the lighting mode corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. In the case of the present embodiment, only D15 is turned on when the selected number of rounds is "4", and only D16 is turned on when the selected number of rounds is "16". The special view 1 display 51, the special view 2 display 52, the round display unit 60, etc. may be configured by a 7-segment display.

FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main substrate) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and a gaming microcomputer 111 (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). And an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference clock for the CPU operating clock or timer interrupt and a random number generation circuit. An oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like is generated. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply apparatus 400 to be operable Be done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V and a DC-DC converter that generates DC voltages of 12 V and 5 V lower than DC voltage of 32 V. A power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure, having a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 111 at power failure and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a substrate different from the power supply 400 or the main substrate. Can be removed from the target of replacement and cost reduction can be achieved.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a random access memory (RAM) 111C which can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariable information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start storage. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is obtained, derivation is already made at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed display results satisfy the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same The state where the identification information is obtained, but excluding the special result aspect) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as reach effects such as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. Expected values are set to increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various A variation pattern random number for determining the variation display game execution time etc. in reach display or non-reach variation display, and a random number generation circuit for generating a collision random number etc for determining hit of the common drawing variation display game And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. There is.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result (big hit or small hit) of the special view variation display game or a probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special view variation display game as the current gaming state. Condition), the operation condition (time-saving operation condition) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of starting memories, etc., one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables Get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize balls. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and performs control for dispensing the ball.

  In the input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the drawing start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a logic signal and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7 V-11 V, so the leads of the sensor or proximity switch are improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead is disconnected and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state as it has become and to output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Note that among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a and the big winning opening switch 38a are input to the second input port 123 . Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud which is provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main substrate 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payment control device A signal indicating whether or not 200 can accept a command), a payout abnormal status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormal), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that the game ball is stored in the lower tray 23 by a predetermined amount or more (full)), a touch switch signal (input of a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the above and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test injection test apparatus is turned off. Is configured as. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done to the trial shot test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

  The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38 b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special fluctuation winning device 38 and a solenoid (common electric solenoid) 37 c opening the movable member 37 b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided to output open / close data of The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Furthermore, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to the open / close data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the common power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 to the output unit 130. The second driver 138 b for outputting the on / off driving signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 Third driver 138c outputting on / off driving signal of lead-in side digit line, fourth driver 138d outputting external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to external device such as management device to external information terminal board 71 Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection apparatus 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 which can be held, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, and instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights up the decoration lamp, and motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. In addition, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) Is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, Receive as). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the sub information display device 90. 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15; a game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls the provided panel effect device 44 (for example, a movable character that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. In addition, the glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and the like, and forms a movable effect device which performs game effects including a special view change display game A presentation device may be provided, and a frame presentation movable body control circuit may be provided to drive and control the frame presentation device.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided in the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. To detect the on / off state of the effect combination product switch 47 (rendering motor switch) to detect the detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, DC voltage of 15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are outputted from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by striking a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by turning members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the common view starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The start winning hole 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 or the special fluctuation winning device 38, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. And, when the game ball wins the general winning a prize opening 35, the starting winning a prize opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 or the special fluctuation winning a prize device 38, the prize balls of the number according to the kind of the winning a prize opening won out From the dispensing unit controlled according to FIG. 4), the glass frame 15 is discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23.

  A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 4) including a non-contact switch or the like for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the common view start gate 34 is provided in the common view start gate 34, and the game area 32 When the game ball driven in passes through the inside of the drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100, the number of common drawing start memories is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34. If it is less than (1), the common drawing start memory number is added (+1) and one common drawing start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of memories of the common drawing start winning combination is displayed on the common drawing reservation display 56 of the batch display device 50. Further, the common drawing start memory stores a random number value (hit random number) for hit determination for determining the result of the common drawing variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a. It is supposed to be

  If the common drawing start memory is present and the common drawing fluctuation display game can be started, that is, the common drawing fluctuation display game is not being executed, and the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If it is not the hit state, the hit determination random number value stored in the first stored common drawing start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit deviation of the common drawing fluctuation display game And perform a process of starting a common drawing variation display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the common drawing variation display game becomes a hit, and a specific result aspect (common drawing identification result) is derived.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 predetermines a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined for a predetermined fluctuation time in the common drawing indicator 53 provided on the collective display device 50 as processing for executing the common drawing fluctuation display game. After displaying the common map during the repeated display in the above order, a processing for displaying the common map change display game is performed to stop and display the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result. In addition, the ordinary drawing display 53 is configured by the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, it is stopped and displayed. You may configure.

  If the result of the popular drawing variation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern which becomes any of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol which makes a special result aspect in the common symbol display 53 according to the type of hit. The stop display is performed, and the common power solenoid 37c is operated to perform control to open the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is a release, control is performed to display a lighting pattern which is a result of the deviation on the common drawing display 53.

  In addition, the winning balls to the start winning hole 36 and the winning balls to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a respectively provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100, the first start memory, which makes a start memory (a special figure start memory) based on winning on the start winning hole 36, is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). In addition to storing, the second starting memory which makes starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the prize winning to the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is stored with a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four pieces) as a limit. A big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information based on winning on the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the extracted disturbances are extracted The numerical values are stored in the RAM 111B as the first start storage and the second start storage. Then, the number of stored start-up memories is displayed on the special view 1 reserve display 54 and the special view 2 reserve display 55 of the collective display 50, and the special view start store is also displayed on the display 41 of the center case 40. Displayed as a display. In addition, it is displayed also on the first sub display unit 91 and the second sub display unit 92 of the sub information display device 90.

  The CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first start memory corresponding to the special view change display game to be started when the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game can be started. A process of determining the hit of the special figure variation display game or the like is performed by comparing the determined big hit determination random number value with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B. Furthermore, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special view variation display game to be executed.

  And, when executing the first special figure fluctuation display game, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 1 display 51 (the fluctuation display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the special figure 1 is displayed during the change, a process is performed to display a first special figure change display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, when the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 2 display 52 (the variable display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the special figure 2 is displayed during the change, a process of displaying a second special figure change display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, characters) corresponding to the special view change display game on the display device 41 (the change display device). A process of displaying a decorative special view variable display game in which a symbol etc. is variably displayed is displayed. Further, the sub game display unit of the sub information display device 90 performs processing for displaying a decorative special view variable display game in which the light emission mode of the light emitting unit is changed corresponding to the special view variable display game. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  The decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 is, for example, a left variation display area (first special symbol), a right variation display area In each of the second special symbol) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high speed variation) at a speed that makes identification difficult. Then, the symbols changing after a predetermined time are stopped sequentially in the order of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area, and stopped in each of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. In addition, in the display device 41, various effect display such as appearance of a character is performed to improve interest.

  And, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes a special result aspect or a small hit result aspect to the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. While displaying a lighting pattern, the processing which generates a special game state and a small hit game state is performed. In addition, the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode or a small hit result mode.

  In the processing to generate the special gaming state and the small hitting gaming state, for example, the CPU 111A of the gaming control device 100 opens the open / close door 38c of the special variation winning device 38 by the big winning opening solenoid 38b, and plays the game into the big winning opening Control to allow inflow of balls. Then, until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. Is a round, and the control (cycle game) is performed to repeat (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is disapproval, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of being a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. In addition, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure even in the high probability state based on the result form of the special figure fluctuation display game of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control apparatus 100 can generate a time saving state (a specific game state, a common drawing high probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short time state, the probability (common drawing probability) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is set to a high probability (general drawing high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general drawing low probability state) Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is larger than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the low probability state. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 in the present embodiment, the drawing probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 ms, When the common game variation display game hits and results in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 being opened, the opening time of the first hit stop symbol (general electric station opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms × 1 time), The opening time of the second stop symbol (general power opening time) and the number of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 2 times), the third opening time of the stopping symbol (general power opening time) and the number of opening (for example, 1700 ms × It can be set to be 3 times).

  In addition, the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of general electric power release, and the general electric power release time are appropriately set to perform control to set the common fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the short time operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (general drawing fluctuation time) of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above to be a second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time. (For example, 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Moreover, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is 704 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (the general public opening time) is the normal state (general drawing low probability state) It is possible to control to become the 2nd opening time longer than 1 opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Also, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, four times). Also, in the time saving state, the probability of becoming a hit result of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing probability) is higher than the normal probability (general drawing low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to have a probability (generally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

  In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of common power release times, the common power release time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. In the case of a hit, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  The special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special view fluctuation display so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use separate display devices or separate display areas in the first special view variable display game and the second special view variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. The decoration special feature variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently and simultaneously, though it is good. Further, the special view variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10. In addition, the second special view variation display game is executed with priority over the first special view variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special view change display game and the second special view change display game, and the special view change display game can be executed, the second special view change display game is It is to be executed (prioritized). Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are not distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as a special view variation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the start opening 1 switch 36a in the start winning opening 36, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switch A noncontact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used in 38a that has a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. ing. Also, a micro-switch having a mechanical contact on the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like and the body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 etc. Can be used.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started by turning on the power. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, after the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed first, the start address of the area for saving the value of the register etc. when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the upper order, and the head 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step S5). The release permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and a process of setting a power on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power-on delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. It can be detected. That is, when the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing that. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

  After the process of setting the power on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the waiting time (steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, set the number of times (for example, 2) to read the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 through the port and the data bus (for example, twice) (step S8) Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure does not occur, the power on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11). Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time is over, the access permission of read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). And outputs the off data to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15) and read first. From the state of the first input port 122, it is determined whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

  If the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S17). If it is (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection region 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection region check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), the checksum calculation processing of calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and power off It is determined whether the check sums of the two match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 of FIG. 7 to perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure.

  In addition, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N) If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 7 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. I

  In step S21 of FIG. 7, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area and an error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared to indicate that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined. Thereafter, the area storing the gaming state in the RWM is checked to determine whether the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is the high probability state (step S22). Here, when it is not in the high probability of the special view (step S22; N), the process skips steps S23 and S24 and shifts to step S25. Also, when the special drawing is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 (On) data is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the below-mentioned special figure game processing is transmitted to the production control board (presentation control device 300) (step S25), step S31 Go to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a screen designated command (a command for a customer waiting demo screen when waiting for a customer, other than that If so, a plurality of commands such as a recovery screen command are sent. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step S26), and all areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). Here, the area to be initialized is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the effect mode. Then, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (displaying a customer waiting demo screen and displaying a predetermined time ( For example, for 30 seconds, a plurality of commands such as a command for performing notification of the RAM initialization with light and sound are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted.

  In step S31, processing is performed to activate a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process of step S31, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S32). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining symbols per special drawing) (Big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number to determine the hit of the common drawing (hit random number), RWM specified as the initial value (start value) of the random number to determine the hit symbol of the common drawing After saving in the area (step S33), the interrupt is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, the hit symbol random number are generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit Is configured as. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, and the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number is a program processing It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC 2 different from CTC (CTC 0) in timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as timer interrupt processing as a unit. Also, in the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number, so-called "initial value changing method of changing the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random type update in which all the values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number is a random number updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus is set (step S36) It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, and the initial value random number update processing in step S35 described above In order to prevent the value random number update process from being performed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. There is no problem in canceling the interrupt before the initial value random number update process if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed but is performed only in the main process, and the main process It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination (step S37) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the processing for temporarily prohibiting the interrupt (step S39) A process (step S40) of outputting off data to the output port is performed.

  Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step S41), and the blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step S42). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum at the time of power interruption of the RWM, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), and then a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45) ) And wait for the power to the game machine to shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

  Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of external operation, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization unit (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 8 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the head address of RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and "0" is set as the calculated value (step S53). . The number of bytes of RAM being used is set to the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is taken as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), and the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56). It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step S57). If the calculation is not completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process is ended.

Initial Value Random Number Update Process
FIG. 9 shows the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the jackpot symbol initial value random number is updated by 1 (step S61), and the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by 1 (step S62). Then, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S64), and the initial value random number updating process is ended.
Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, and "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the small hit of the special figure variation display game It is the random number which becomes the initial value of the random number which decides the stop design. In addition, “the initial hit random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the common view variation display game, and “the first hit random number” is a random number that determines the stop symbol for the common view variation display game. It is a random number that becomes an initial value. Thus, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing.
In addition, small hit design random numbers naturally do not exist in models without small hits. In addition, depending on the model, there is also a gaming machine in which there is no hit symbol initial value random number.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt is generated in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 10 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input from various sensors and switches, and taking in of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S104) is performed to control the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, a common power solenoid 37c). Note that when a signal for stopping the emission is output in step S5 in the main processing, the output processing causes the emission permission signal to be output, and the emission permission signal can be set to the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of release permission seen from the game control device, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating the state of release permission viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) are performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from start opening 1 switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a, gate switch 34a of common drawing, winning opening switch 35a, big winning opening switch 38a, monitoring of error ( A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108) is performed to determine whether the front frame and the glass frame are open. In addition, special figure game processing (step S109) which performs processing concerning a special figure fluctuation display game and common drawing game processing (step S110) which performs processing concerning a common drawing fluctuation display game is performed.

Next, segment LED editing processing (step S111) provided in the gaming machine 10 to drive the segment LED for displaying the special view variation display game and displaying various information related to the game to display desired content (step S111) Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) that performs processing to check the detection signal from the sensor to determine whether there is an abnormality or board radio fraud that performs processing to check the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S114) is performed to set signals output to various external devices in the output buffer (step S114), and the timer interrupt process is ended.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, ie, the first input port 122, is read (step S121). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

  Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), and the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124). And the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM (step S125). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is an inverted bit of the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data Are prepared (step S127), and the switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, "prepare" in the present embodiment means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.

  Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is an inverted bit of the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data Are prepared (step S132), the switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is ended.

Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 may be different data but may be data of the same value as a result. is there.
Moreover, although the bit data to be inverted of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data, there is a possibility that they may be data of the same value as a result. is there.

[Switch reading process]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), and the bit necessary for inversion is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Save (store) (step S144). Then, it waits for the delay time (for example, about 100 microseconds) until the second reading to elapse (step S145).

  When the delay time has elapsed, the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S147), and the bit necessary for inversion is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Save (store) (step S149). After that, a definite bit pattern in which the bit in the same state is 1 and the bit in the other is 0 in the first and second readings is created (step S150), and the definite bit pattern and port input state 2 are ANDed this time The decision bit is set (step S151).

  Next, an undetermined bit pattern in which the state is 0 and the other bit is 1 in the first and second readings is created (step S152), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the determined state at the previous interrupt The product is taken and it is set as the previously held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain the state of a signal from which noise due to chattering of a switch or the like has been removed. Then, the currently determined bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved as the currently decided state (step S154), exclusive OR is performed between the previous and currently decided states, and saved as the rising edge (step S155). , Finish the switch reading process.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing the result with the previous reading result. Although there is a method of determining whether or not a change has occurred, if the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that the correct determination can not be made. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interruption process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs data of the segment of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output is synthesized and output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the common power solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step S164). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, data of "door / frame open" data of "security signal") are output ports for digit / external information output It outputs to 136 (step S166).
Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S168). In the present embodiment, for example, the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52, the generic view indicator 53, the special view 1 reserve indicator 54 and the special view 2 reserve indicator 55, and the generic view reserve display The unit 56, the round display unit 60, and the second gaming state display unit 58 are turned on dynamically.

  Subsequently, various output data of external information are synthesized (step S169), and the synthesized data (for example, data of "big hit signal 1", data of "big hit signal 2", data of "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal" Output data of 4 "data of" pattern decision number signal ", data of" starting opening signal ", data of" main prize ball signal ") and output data of firing permission (step S170), and the synthesized data is The information is output to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / emission permission signal (step S171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S172). Thereafter, data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S173).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S174). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S176), the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prize for which the payout command has not been transmitted yet The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a winning ball command counter capable of storing information on the winning ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here 10). In the area to be used, data of winning corresponding to the winning balls not subjected to the generation processing of the main winning ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor fraudulent payments by collating these two signals.

In these winning number counter areas, the winning number counter area is set according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (three winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls in the case of this embodiment). The counter number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning on the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, while transmission may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which the payout command is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in the three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1, respectively. The three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2 are configured to be able to store up to 255 prizes.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, “0” in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the winning balls remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining winning balls area (step S187). In addition, as the value of the remaining number area of winning balls before this processing, a fraction which does not meet a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main winning ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. If the number is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, whenever the number of remaining winning balls is ten, the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the remaining number area of the winning balls (step S191), and the process returns to the process of step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined pay area. . In addition, when the payout of the game ball such as during a big hit is concentrated by outputting the main prize ball signal, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accurate occurrence occurred during the big hit It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of winning balls can not be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

  In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194).

  The payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control, and the payout busy signal is in the on state (busy state) when the payout control can not be immediately started. Be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal makes a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (the payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay the prize ball. When in the state, it is configured to transmit a payout command. As described above, when the payout control device 200 can not immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform the useless processing by preventing the subsequent processing regarding the transmission of the payout command. We try to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  The conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy status) are, for example, during the payout operation, the ball lending operation, the shoot ball out error, the overflow error, the frame radio wave illegal occurrence, the payout ball detection switch (dispensed The number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormality of a switch for monitoring a shot ball, a shortage of payout error, a payout excess error, and the number of unpaid balls Etc) (when it is not = 0) etc.

  If the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, "0" in the winning number counter area to be checked Determine if there is a non-count number.

  Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S 197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

  If it is determined in step S195 that there is a counted number (step S195; Y), the counted number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 The payout amount command corresponding to the address of is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout amount command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms is set as an initial value, for example.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control output from the payout control means (the payout control device 200) indicates that the game control device 100 can start the payout control. In this case, the winning ball command transmitting means transmits the winning ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, since the game control apparatus 100 controls the game ball command to be transmitted based on the state signal output from the payout control apparatus 200, the award is made only when the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so when a power failure occurs, it will be backed up by the game control device 100 and backed up to the payout control device 200. Accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the function for

  In a conventional gaming machine (e.g., the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when the power is shut off due to some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before the power is shut off. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the cost increases because the function for backing up is required. According to the present invention, accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the dispensing control device 200 with a function for backup.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to an external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can pay out the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Further, since the prize ball instruction counter capable of storing information on the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing the information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball having different transmission timings Information on signals can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is generally performed, and the game ball to the winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation winning device 38) provided in the game area 32 Game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game, and payout control means (payout control device) for controlling the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means 200), and the game control means controls the payout ball command based on the status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. The control to transmit to the means is performed, and when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is outputted from the payout control device. Payment The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is continuously output from the payout control means over the predetermined period without transmitting to the control means. It will be like that.

  In addition, the game area 32 is provided with a plurality of winning areas with different numbers of winning balls (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation winning device 38), and the game control means (game control device 100) The prize ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) which can specify the presence or absence of non-transmission of the prize ball command which instructs the payout control of the game ball for every prize ball number, the state signal can start the payout control , And when there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter, the winning ball command is sent to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the status signal indicates the payout control means It will be made to specify before specification of whether or not the payout control can be started before specification of whether or not there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter.

  In addition, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and a winning ball command is issued based on the winning of the gaming ball to a predetermined winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation winning device 38). A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a game, and a payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing a payout control of a game ball based on a prize ball command sent from the game control means; The control means is configured to control the payout ball command when the status signal output from the payout control means and indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. A prize ball signal transmitting means (game control apparatus 100) to be sent to the means, and a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the gaming ball in a predetermined prize area. Of the gaming machine The external information output means (game control apparatus 100) to output to the unit, and the external information output means determines whether the state signal output from the payout control means can start the payout control or not The output of the winning ball signal is performed regardless of.

  In addition, even if the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) generates a power failure and returns from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicates that payout control can be started. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It will be transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the award ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing information on the award ball command and the information on the award ball signal (main award ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) has a predetermined winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation) The winning ball command is generated on the basis of one winning to the winning device 38), and one winning ball command is paid out when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The game ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the winnings in units of one winning on a predetermined winning area, and can play the game on the predetermined winning area. Ball winning The number of award ball commands not transmitted can be stored by updating in response to the transmission to the award ball command to the payout control means, and the external information output means is configured to perform predetermined winnings. It is configured to accumulate the number of winning balls determined to be paid out with the game ball to the area, and to output a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number, and the winning ball signal counter The information of the winning can be stored on the basis of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and the game ball is updated at the time of winning in a predetermined winning area, and the number of winning balls by the external information output means is accumulated. By updating in accordance with the processing, it is possible to store the number of winning balls that have not been subjected to the accumulation processing.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 15 shows the random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating an initial value (start value) of a big hit symbol random number, a small hit symbol random number, a hit random number, and a hit symbol random number which is an object of the initial value random number update processing. In the random number updating process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).
If the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the small hitting symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214). If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number loaded corresponds The start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value (step S213). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

  If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not the random number for the general drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217). If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial initial of the loaded small hit symbol random number A value is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). After that, it is determined whether or not the random number in the general drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

  When the hit random number in the common drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), it is determined whether the hit symbol random number in the common drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220). If the random number per block is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the next initial stage of the random number per block is loaded The value is set in the register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the hit symbol random number in the common drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220).

  If the hit pattern random number in the common drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended. Also, if the hit pattern random number in the common drawing is waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; Y), the next initial value is loaded with the initial symbol random value (step S221), and the loaded common drawing random number The next initial value is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S222), and the random number updating process 1 is ended.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 16 shows the random number updating process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1 byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2 byte random number (variation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers, and both random update processing 2 Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, updating of 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach variation mode determination) by random number updating process 2 executed in one interrupt process for main process is performed for either upper 1 byte or lower 1 byte. Are configured to

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for specifying in order which random number of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step S231). In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Then, when the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the variation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when “1”, the variation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when “2” The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is "3", the variation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referenced based on the calculated address (step S234). In the table referred to at this time, the upper limit judgment value for each kind of random number, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random number has made a round is stored.

  Subsequently, for example, the CPU used as a gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as "R register") used for refreshing DRAM etc. In addition, although the counter "M1 counter" which operates in the same manner as the R register is built in, the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). The randomness can be given randomness by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is obtained, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). The mask value is the number of bits different depending on the random number to be updated, for example, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit value is different depending on the type of random number. When the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter is updated. When the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower order of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited thereto.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). Then, if the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S 236; Y), the value left by masking the value of the M 1 counter with the mask value as the added value Is set as a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to “masked value”, and the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S 237), and the process proceeds to step S 239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S 236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value ( The process proceeds to step S239). The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0", and adding "0" later does not change from the value before addition, so to avoid it. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2-byte) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), Go to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated as the lower 1 byte of the random value (1 A byte is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S 242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S 237 or S 238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether this new random value is larger than the upper limit judgment value acquired in step S 233 (step S243). Then, if the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; N), the new random number value is saved in a lower random number area of 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number value is taken as a new random number again (step S244). The data is saved in a lower random number area of byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number updating process 2 is ended. If the random number is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), the new random number value (when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the high-order random number area of the 2-byte random number (step S247). And the random number updating process 2 ends.
In the case of this embodiment, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, and the type information of the random number area to be updated (1-byte random number, 2-byte random number (upper), 2-byte random number (lower)) on the effect random number update table. The address of the update area, etc. is defined for the type of random number to be updated (4 blocks).

  As described above, the CPU 111A updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the detection of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning apparatus 37. It is a random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 17 shows the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one big winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S301), and the high winning opening Even though the key is not open, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S302) is executed to monitor whether the prize winning opening has an illegal prize and to detect a normal prize.

  In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input on the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of a fraud winning number area, a fraud winning error notification command, a fraud winning The information of the number upper limit value (the number of irregularities judged), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. In addition to the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches) in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit, lower address of winning number counter area 1, winning number counter area 2 for each switch. The lower address information of is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared for each of the switches to be monitored.

  After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other big winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and it is monitored whether there is an incorrect winning and normal winning is achieved. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S304) to detect is performed.

  Next, prepare the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the general public (step S305), and monitor whether there is an incorrect winning and detect the normal winning while the fraud & winning monitoring process (Step S306) is executed. Then, the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) which does not need the fraud monitoring process is prepared (step S307), and the number of winnings is updated. A counter update process (step S308) is performed.

  Next, a state scan counter for specifying in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches whose state should be monitored and which signal is to be the target of the current monitoring is updated (step S309). In the case of the present embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

  In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is “0”, a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like The monitoring of the state based on one signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is “2”, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is “3”, monitoring of the status based on the payout abnormality status signal is configured. Ru.

  Next, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

  In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. The monitoring of the state is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the main body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. Moreover, when the value of the state scan counter is "2", monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is It is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine determines whether or not an error has occurred. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

  In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like of the switch. Monitoring of the state based on two signals is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) is performed to check a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. Note that the processing in steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 ms.

[Incorrect & prize monitoring process]
FIG. 18 shows the fraud & prize monitoring process (steps S302, S304, and S306) in the above-described prize hole switch / state monitoring process. This fraud & prize monitoring process is a process performed on each of the two big winning opening switches 38a of the special variation winning device 38 and the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning device 37. The detection of winnings is easy for the large winnings opening (special variation winning device 38) and the Fuden (normal variation winning device 37) because the opening and closing members are forcibly opened to insert the game balls and the award balls are paid out. In addition to the monitoring of fraud.

  In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S 321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S 322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special game state in which the special variation winning device 38 is opened when the winning hole switch targeted for error monitoring is the large winning hole switch 38a, and the winning hole switch for error monitoring is started In the case of the mouth 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is being executed based on the hit of the drawing.

  Then, if it is a fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S323). If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (Step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (Step S332). If there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target number of incorrect winnings is updated by +1 (step S324), and the number of updated incorrect winnings is equal to or greater than the number of monitoring targets. It is determined whether there is any (step S325).

In the case of this embodiment, regardless of the type of winning opening switch subject to error monitoring, the number of fraud determination determinations is set to five, but the number of unauthorized occurrences defines a different number for each type of winning opening switch. It can also be done.
For example, when the winning opening in the open state is converted to the closing state, the gaming ball is caught in the door member of the winning opening, and the gaming ball is in the effective period of the winning opening switch. The reason is that it is not to judge that the signal is illegitimate if the player has won a prize or the signal has a noise, and it is not so easy to judge it as an error although it is not illegitimate.

  Then, if the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrences to be monitored (Step S325; N), a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (Step S330). If the number of fraudulent prizes is equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrences to be monitored (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent prizes is limited to the number of fraudulent occurrences (step S326). (For example, 60000 ms) is saved (step S327). Next, a target fraudulent generation command is prepared (step S328), a fraudulent prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step S329), and the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step S340). ).

  On the other hand, if the fraud monitoring period is not underway (step S322; N), the winning hole monitoring table of the target winning hole switch is prepared (step S330), and the winning number counter update process (step S331) for setting the winning balls is performed. Do. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332), and it is determined whether or not the update permission of the notification timer is permitted (step S333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S333; N), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. When updating of the notification timer is permitted (step S333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S334). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is one big winning opening switch 38a, and is not permitted when the winning hole switch subject to error monitoring is the other big winning opening switch 38a. As a result, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently as the incorrect notification about the special variation winning device 38, and it is prevented that the time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). When the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S335), and if the value is not 0 (step S335; N), that is, time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step S335; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, prepare the target fraud release command (step S336) and set the fraud recovery flag as a fraud flag. Prepare (step S337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338).

  If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S 338; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize monitoring process, the target number of wrong prizes is cleared ( Step S339), compare the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340). Also, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S 338; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted The value of the incorrect flag area is compared (step S340).

  Then, when the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340; Y), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S341), and rendering command setting processing is performed. (Step S 342), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the occurrence of an error, and an incorrect prize error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 along with the release of the error, and the start and end of the error notification are set. It will be done.

[Winning number counter update processing]
FIG. 19 shows winning number counter updating processing (steps S308 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is obtained from the winning opening monitoring table (step S 351), and whether there is an input (accurate change in input) to the target winning opening switch It determines (step S352).

  If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (step S362). If the target winning opening switch has an input (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether it overflows (step S355). When no overflow occurs (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). If an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S354, the counter for winning balls (disbursement command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0-65535).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S 357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S 358), and it is determined whether the overflow occurs (step S 359). When no overflow occurs (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). It is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has ended (step S362). If an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (step S362). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main winning ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0-255).

  If monitoring of all the switches has not ended (step S362; N), the process returns to the process (step S352) of determining whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is ended. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning on the winning area, and the information on the winning is stored.

[Pachislot machine state check process]
FIG. 20 shows the gaming machine state check process (steps S311, S313, S316) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is obtained (step S371), and it is determined whether a signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

  Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table (the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the winning hole switch / state monitoring process). As this information, for example, the lower address of the head address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal Judgment data of ON, state OFF command (make error notification end command in case of error system), state ON command (make error notification start command in case of error system), state OFF monitoring timer comparison value, state ON monitoring timer Contains the comparison value.

  If the target signal is not on (step S372; N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step S373), and the state off command of the object is acquired and prepared (step S374). Thereafter, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S 375), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S 379). If the target signal is not on (step S 372: N), it is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (is normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

  On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S372; Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step S376), and the state on command of the target is acquired and prepared (step S377). Thereafter, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S378), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379). The case where the target signal is on (step S 372; Y) is a state indicating that the error signal is an error (abnormal or incorrect), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. Is a state showing

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the current signal (step S379; Y), that is, if the state of the signal has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382) It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the state of the current signal (step S379; N), that is, if the state of the signal changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area Step S380). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S 381), the target status monitoring timer is updated by 1 (step S 382), and it is determined whether the target status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step S383).

  If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and the comparison value is kept at -1 (step S384). The status flag thus compared is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S385).

  Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S385; Y), the gaming machine state check process is ended. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the rendering command setting process is performed. Then (step S387), the gaming machine state check process is ended. As a result, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in step S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Discharge busy signal check process]
FIG. 21 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S317) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 can not start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is on (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and an on determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S393), It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S394), and an off determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S395) It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interrupts.

  If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S396; N), the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area (step S397), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. (Step S398), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399). If the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400). If it is not greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The payout busy signal check process ends. Also, if it is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of comparison value -1 (step S401) to prepare in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check process is ended.

  By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, and the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be influenced by

  In addition, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an undefined state until any signal state continues for the signal determination time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout control device 200 immediately outputs the winning ball command even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. And the payout ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the special view game process, the monitoring of the input of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the control of the entire processing concerning the special view variation display game, and the setting of the display of the special view are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the special view game process, first, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) is performed to monitor winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is a winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers etc.) are extracted, A game result prior determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance before the start of the figure variation display game.

  Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of the gaming ball at the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure variation A special drawing routine processing (step A8) is performed to set information necessary for performing processing.
At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "1", the special figure variation process which performs setting of the stop display time of the special figure, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

  If the special figure game processing number is "2" at step A7, and if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the big winning opening of each big hit The special chart display process (step A10) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the release pattern, set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process, and the like.

If the special figure game processing number is "3" at step A7, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. A fanfare / interval process (step A11) is performed.
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing of setting the ending command when the final round, the big winning opening remaining A special winning opening open process (step A12) is performed to set information necessary for ball processing.

If the special figure game processing number is "5" in step A7, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the big hit end processing A special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) is performed to set information necessary for the execution.
If the special figure game process number is "6" in step A7, a big hit end process (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is “7”, to set the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, to set the fanfare command, to perform the small hit middle processing A small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) is performed to set necessary information.
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hitting middle process (step A16) is performed to set the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hitting residual ball processing, etc. .
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hit middle process, a small hit end process The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the above.
At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "10", small hit ending process (step A18) is performed to set information etc. necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

  Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special view 1 display 51 (step A19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) related to the special view 1 display 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), the symbol variation control processing (step A22) concerning the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the special figure game processing is ended. Do. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" at step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit occurs and it is special as a special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 38 continuously is set (the character continuous operating device is operated). If the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 23, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36), a prize monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed. (1) It is determined whether or not there is a winning on the starting opening (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning on the first starting opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning on the first starting opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (during general public support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. . That is, if it is a time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game, a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless the player strikes the left at the first starting opening (start winning opening 36), and does not win the prize unless the player normally strikes the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is advantageous, but there is a win in the first starting opening during the time saving state (that is, the left hitting in the time saving state) In addition, the presentation control device 300 is configured to send a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform notification (warning) instructing to perform a right-handling operation.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the first start port (start winning port 36) (step A107), the special view start port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, prepare a second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) prize monitoring table (step A109), perform hard random number acquisition processing (step A110), and whether or not there is a winning to the second starting opening It determines (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning on the second starting opening (step A111; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the second starting opening (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37) is in operation, ie, normal fluctuation If it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which winning of the gaming ball is possible (step A112), and it is determined that the ordinary electric role is in operation (step A112; Y) It transfers to the process of A114 and performs the process after it. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary motor-operated combination is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether a common electric charge fraud is occurring (step A113).

  In the determination as to whether or not the general electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent prizes to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is equal to or more than the fraud occurrence judgment number (for example 5). In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gaming ball can not be won in the closed state, and the gaming ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the gaming ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a gaming ball winning in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent winnings. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

  If it is determined in step A113 that no ordinary power transmission is occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step A114) The figure starting opening switch common processing (step A115) is done, it ends starting opening switch supervision processing. If it is determined in step A113 that a general power transmission fraud is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated further.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the hard random number acquisition process, first of all, of the first start opening (start winning opening 36) and the second start opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37), no prize information of the starting opening to be monitored. The setting is made (step A121), and it is determined whether there is an input to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended. On the other hand, if there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124). .

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number is extracted, the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. When latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded and prepared in the hard random number latch register to be monitored (step A125). Then, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37), the winning presence information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), hard random number acquisition processing finish.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. The special view starting opening switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the special view starting opening switch common processing, first, information on the number of winnings on the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is Load the starting opening signal output count which is the number of outputs to the external management device (step A131), update the loaded value by +1 (step A132), and determine whether the output count overflows (step A133) ). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start aperture signal output number area of RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by +1 updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations (starting storage) corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (step A135). If the number of to-be-updated holdings to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special drawing starting opening switch common processing ends. In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of to-be-updated special figures (number of specially-designated 1 reservations or specially-designated number 2) is updated +1 Step A136) Save the target starting opening winning flag (Step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special views reserved is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random numbers of the starting opening switch to be monitored are extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is a winning on the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that it is not a winning to the first starting opening (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the first starting opening has been won (step A142; Y), small hit symbol random numbers are extracted and prepared (step A143), RWM small hit symbols It saves in the random number storage area (step A144).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A145), and the special figure holding information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Then, prepare a decoration special view reservation number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the special view reservation number (step A 147), perform the rendering command setting process (step A 148), and execute the special view start aperture switch common process. finish.

  Here, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the start winning opening 36 and the start winning area of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A start storage means is provided for storing a predetermined number at the upper limit as start storage. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) sets various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as the first start storage with the predetermined number as the upper limit. It stores and stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball on the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described. The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

As shown in FIG. 26, first, the starting opening winning flag saved in step A137 is checked to determine whether it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A151).
If it is determined in step A151 that it is not a winning to the first starting opening (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A151 that a winning on the first starting opening has been won (step A151; Y), it is determined whether the special drawing time is short (step A152).

When it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is short (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is not short (step A152; N), it is determined whether the jackpot is medium or small hit (step A153).
If it is determined in step A153 that the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit (step A153; Y), the special map reservation information determination process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A153 that the big hit or small hit is not in progress (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is based on whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. A big hit determination process (step A154) is performed. Then, if the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting opening switch (step A156), and correspond to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that it is not a winning on the first starting opening (step A158; N), stop symbol information of the release is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the first starting opening has been won (step A158; Y), the big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value or not A small hit determination process (step A159) to determine whether or not to perform. Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the removal is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 It acquires (step A162), and it transfers to the process of step A164.

  Then, a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A165). Next, special figure information setting processing (step A166) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and variation pattern setting process for setting a variation aspect of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A 167).

  Thereafter, a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern of the special view fluctuation display game is prepared (step A168) (Step A <b> 169) The special-image hold information determination process ends. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the process executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process.

  With the above processing, the prefetch pattern command including the result of the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target and the prefetch fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared And sent to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not a big hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning memory storage means (game control device 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained (Determine whether or not etc.) Make pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether the special winning opening is being processed (step A201). . When the special winning opening open process is being performed (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special drawing game processing number is "5", that is, the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (step A202).
If the special winning opening game is being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening game is not being processed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, the small hit is being processed (step A203). ).
If the small hit is being processed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the small hit is not being processed (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special process game processing number is "9", that is, the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step A204).
Since the special figure game process number does not shift next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, it is possible to check the progress of the game by the special figure game process number.

If the small hit residual ball processing is not in progress (step A 204; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. If the small hit residual sphere process is being performed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205.
Then, "0" is set to the winning counter (step A205), and it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (one big winning opening switch 38a) (step A206).

  If there is no input on the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; N), it is determined whether there is an input on the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 38a) (step A210). When the special winning opening switch 1 has an input (step A206; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A207), and effect command setting processing (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 38a) (step A210).

  If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). When the special winning opening switch 2 has an input (step A210; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A211), and effect command setting processing (step A212) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A213), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214).

When the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A268), if the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
If the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215).
When the special winning opening residual ball processing is under (step A215; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, and when the special winning opening residual ball processing is not under (step A215; N), the small hitting residual ball processing It is determined whether it is medium (step A216).
If small ball remaining ball processing is being performed (step A 216; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended, and if small ball remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A 216; N), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the special winning opening count (step A217), and it is determined whether the special winning opening count has reached the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, "9") (step A 218).

  When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step A218; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the special winning opening count is equal to or higher than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the special view game processing timer area is cleared to 0 ( Step A220) It is determined whether the small hit is being processed (step A221). If the small hit is not under process (step A221; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is finished, and if the small hit is under processing (step A221; Y), the big hit opening control pointer area is small hit. The value of the opening operation end is saved (step A222), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, details of the special view routine processing (step A8) in the special view game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the special view ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the number of special view 2 reservations (second start storage number) is "0" (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 pending number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 pending number (first start storage number) is "0" (step A306). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 1 reservation number is "0" (step A306; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo is started (step A311), and the customer waiting demo is not started (step A311) A311; N) sets the waiting for customer demonstration flag in the waiting for customer demonstration flag area (step A312).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A313), rendering command setting processing (step A314) is performed, special processing routine processing transition setting processing 1 (step A315) is performed, and special processing normal processing is ended. . On the other hand, when the customer waiting demo has been started in step A311 (step A311; Y), the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is ended.

Also, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" in step A301 (step A301; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number A reserve number command is prepared (step A303), and effect command setting processing (step A304) is performed. Then, the processing for setting transition to special processing during special drawing of special drawing 2 (step A305) is performed, and the special drawing processing is ended.
Also, if the special drawing 1 reservation number is not "0" at step A306 (step A306; N), the special drawing 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed, and the decorative special drawing corresponding to the special drawing 1 reservation number A number-of-holds command is prepared (step A308), and effect command setting processing (step A309) is performed. Then, the processing for setting transition to special processing during special drawing 1 of special drawing 1 (step A310) is performed, and the special drawing routine processing is ended.

  As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is performed when the special figure 2 pending number is not “0” by checking the special figure 2 pending number before the special figure 1 pending number check. Will be executed. That is, the second special view variation display game is executed with priority over the first special view variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is the variable display based on the first start memory It is a priority control means that is executed prior to the game.

[Special figure normal process shift setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special view ordinary process shift setting process 1 (step A 315) in the above-mentioned special view ordinary process and the special view routine process shift setting process 1 (step A 741) in the special figure display process described later will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1, first, "0" related to the special figure ordinary process is set as the process number (step A321), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area. (Step A322), the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A323). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the special processing routine processing transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) in the special view normal process described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 30, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A331). A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed to set deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the display game is a big hit.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A 333) according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). Thereafter, fluctuation pattern setting processing (step A 336) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation aspect in the first special view fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting processing for setting information of fluctuation start of the first special drawing fluctuation display game (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302) in the above special figure normal process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. It is done as.

  As shown in FIG. 31, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341). A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A 342) is performed to set deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the display game is a big hit.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the second special figure fluctuation display game (Step A347) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
In FIG. 32, the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process was shown. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A 351), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A 352). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A353), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 To do (step A354). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A355) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is a big hit (step A356; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area in which the outlier information was saved in step A352 (step A357) ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether the prepared big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value or not Small hit determination processing (step A 358) for determining

  Then, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A 358) is a small hit (step A 359; Y), the small hit information is saved by overwriting the small hit information in the small hit flag area saved with the out information in step A 351 (Step A360), the big hit flag 1 setting processing ends. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A 358) is not the small hit (step A 359; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the outlier information in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special view variation display game is one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “deterioration”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
In FIG. 33, the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process was shown. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A372). It should be noted that the one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A 374) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A 374) is a big hit (step A 375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area saved with the out information in step A 371 (step A 375). ), And the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A 374) is not a big hit (step A 375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended while the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special view variation display game is either “big hit” or “losing”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 34 shows the big hit determination process (steps A154, A355, A374) in the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination process, the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process. In the jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (step A381), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (step A382). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 387), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. Specifically, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or a drop, "other than a big hit (small hit or drop)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A 374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A 382; Y) Therefore, "other than big hit (out)" is set as the determination result (step A387).
If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; N), it is determined whether the state is a high probability state (step A 383).

  Then, if it is in the high probability state (step A383; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set (step A384), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A386). ). If the state is not the high probability state (step A383; N), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A386) .

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 357), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. Specifically, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A 355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A 386; Y), Since it is a hit or a drop, "other than big hit (small hit or drop)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A 374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A 386; Y), it is an off As the determination result, "other than big hit (out)" is set (step A387).
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A 388), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 35 shows small hit determination processing (steps A159 and A358) in the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination processing and the big hit flag 1 setting processing. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit judgment value is set, and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is smaller than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391). In addition, small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. That is, being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to be covered.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; Y), that is, if it is a loss, a hit is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit judgment processing is ended.
If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit judgment value is set and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (Step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is a disconnection, a gap is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit judgment processing is ended.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A394) and the small hit judgment processing is ended. Do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area ) And the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 1 display 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A 407), the time shortening determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time shortening determination is made. The data is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. In the case of the present embodiment, the rendering mode shifts in response to a hit, and the transition destination of the rendering mode, which shifts after an end, changes in accordance with the type of the hit symbol (type of big hit symbol or small hit). In addition, if it becomes a specific big hit symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) among the big hit in the special figure 1, depending on whether or not the game state is in a definite change, the transition destination's effect mode will be a definite change definite It is determined whether to shift to a rendering mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether the rendering mode is a definite variation or not. Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410). If it is a small hit (step A411; Y) A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).
Thereafter, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A416), Save (step A417), and prepare a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A419), and effect command setting processing (step A420) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422). The small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 change start process described above. In this special view 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A 431). If it is a big hit (step A 431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of reservations 1) ) And the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step A433), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired, it saves in the special figure 2 stop design number territory (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 2 display 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A 437), and the time shortening determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time shortening determination is made. The data is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, it becomes a dedicated effect mode in which the effect mode of the transfer destination becomes a definite variation determination regardless of which big hit symbol. Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A 442).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A 441). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A443), and a rendering command setting process (step A444) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446). 2 Stop symbol setting processing ends.

  That is, the game control apparatus 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game (based on the first start storage) based on the detection of the gaming ball at the first start winning opening (the starting winning opening 36), Based on the detection of the game ball at the second start winning opening (normal change winning device 37) (based on the second start memory) to form a game execution means to execute the second variable display game as a variable display game. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes game execution means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special map information setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination process, special view 1 change start process, and special view information setting process (steps A166, A334, A344) in the special view 2 change start process will be described. In the case of this embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, presence / absence of time reduction) does not affect the distribution of the change, and the effect mode managed by the game control apparatus 100 affects the distribution of the change. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes in accordance with the probability state, the presence or absence of a time saving state, the progress status of the special view variation display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 38, in the special view information setting process, first, the former half fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the former half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the rendering mode information is acquired (step A452).
Then, the first half variation group selection offset table is set (step A453), and the offset data corresponding to the target special drawing reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).
Next, the former half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, in the variable distribution information 1 area, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation mode before the start of reach), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, although depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when the number of reservations is large, it is only in the case of loss, and as a result, the number of reservations does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns. When determining the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation group is selected, and one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Then, the second half fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the second half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).
Then, the second half fluctuation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and the offset data corresponding to the target special drawing reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).
Then, the latter half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is ended. As a result, in the variable distribution information 2 area, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (including the type of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of reservations only in the case of an outfall (the reach incidence rate decreases when the number of reservations is large). Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special view reserve information determination process, special view 1 change start process, and special pattern 2 change start pattern change process (steps A167, A336, A346) will be described. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation aspect from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation which is the fluctuation aspect from the reaching state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game The second half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

  As shown in FIG. 39, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection address table is set (step A 471), and the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472) Load and prepare the variation pattern random number 1 from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) (step A 473). In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half fluctuation group table is different in structure between a hit and a break. Specifically, it has a 1-byte size for hit and a 2-byte size for release. Since the rate of occurrence per hit is lower than the rate of occurrence of departure and even one byte is sufficient, the footprint is one byte in size from the viewpoint of saving of data capacity. Therefore, the hit time uses only the lower value of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1. In addition, the rate of occurrence of outliers is higher than the incidence rate of hits, and in order to make various renditions appear, the size for the removal is 2 bytes.

  Then, it is judged whether or not the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is disapproval (step A 474). Transfer to processing. If not (step A474; N), the distribution process (step A476) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A477.

  Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A 477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1), Prepare (step A 478). Then, distribution processing (step A 479) is performed, and the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half fluctuation number area (step A 480). By this process, the second half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step A 481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A 482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holdings 1). To do (step A 484). Thereafter, distribution processing (step A485) is performed, the first-half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and saved in the first-half fluctuation number area (step A486), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of a game, from a plurality of patterns.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A337 and A347) in the above-mentioned special drawing 1 fluctuation start process and special drawing 2 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

  Then, the former half fluctuation time value and the latter half fluctuation time value are added (step A 496), and the addition value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 497). Thereafter, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A 498), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A 499), and rendering command setting processing is performed (step A 500). ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the free space after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the fluctuation start information setting process is ended.

  Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game. The detailed effect contents in the special figure variation display game are set. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game A variation command including information on a pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of a stop time may be mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command, the process in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Process transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 1)]
FIG. 41 shows the processing for setting transition to a process during special figure variation in the special figure normal process (special figure 1) (step A310). In the special figure variation process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, "1" is set as the process number (step A511), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A512).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A513), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and select the initial value of the blinking control timer in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area Here, 52 ms) is set (step A 516), and the special processing during process transition setting processing (special drawing 1) is ended.

[Process transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 2)]
FIG. 42 shows the processing for setting transition to processing of special processing during special processing during special processing (special drawing 2) (step A305). In the special figure variation process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, "1" is set as the process number (step A521), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A522).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A523), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A524). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A525), the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 52 blink timer) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area Here, 104 ms) is set (step A 526), and the special processing during process transition setting processing (special drawing 2) is ended.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 43, in the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602). ). In the case of this embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and if the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol is If the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time.
Next, the special-image display process transition setting process (step A603) is performed, and the special-image display process is ended. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Process transition setting process during special map display]
FIG. 44 shows the processing for setting the processing shift during processing for the special view display in the processing for the special view fluctuation described above (step A603). In the special figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number "2" related to the special figure display process is set (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A612).

  Next, save the signal related to the end of fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A613), the signal related to the end of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, special symbol 2) Save the fluctuation signal in the test signal output data area (Step A614), and start the control timer in the control signal area for the number of times the symbol is determined according to the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game is output to the external information terminal. A value (for example, 256 ms) is saved (step A615). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 1 display 51 is saved in the special view 1 change control flag area (step A616) Save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52 in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A617), Special processing during process transition setting processing ends.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, the details of the special view display process (step A10) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, in the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A 701). The small hit flag area is cleared (step A702).
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded (Step A703) A process (Step A704) of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is performed. Then, it is judged whether the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step A 705) and when it is determined that it is a big hit (step A 705; Y), the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special view fluctuation display game Save the test signal for the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the commodity continuous operation device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 signal is ON) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A 708), A round number upper limit table is set (step A709).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit as a result of checking the big hit flag 2 (step A 705; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706) and a big hit (step A706; Y), the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the feature continuous operation device operating signal ON) regarding the start of the big hit (special feature 1 big hit) of the first special figure fluctuation display game, The special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A 707), and the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A 709) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A 709), the round number upper limit ("16" or "4" in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM The number of rounds is saved in the upper limit value area of (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command is prepared according to the information that makes the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game a normal probability state (low probability state) (step A714). (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 1 or special view 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step Do A717).

  Next, the information corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A 718, two jackpots and three jacks are saved as signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON if the big hit with popped out (big prize opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opened information 1), the big hit without popping out (so-called, 確 certain big hit etc. Large winning opening open If the information is a large winning opening opening information 1), it will be ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it will be OFF otherwise. In addition, the jackpot 3 signal is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot with some balls, and is OFF when the jackpot is a jackpot without balls.

  After that, the big hit opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms or 300 ms) corresponding to the probability of being hit in the common view change display game and the special view change display game The setting is made (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special view when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the large winning a prize opening fraud winning number area of the special winning a prize opening (the special fluctuation winning a prize device 38) which corresponds to the special winning a prize opening opening information is cleared (step A722), the special winning a prize winning opening which corresponds to the special winning opening information The fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, fanfare / interval process shift setting process 1 (step A 724) is performed, and the special figure display process is ended. That is, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special fluctuation winning device 38 into the open state based on the result being a special result in any of the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view fluctuation display game. It is a special game state generating means that generates a state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
If it is determined in step A 725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A 725; Y), the high probability change number updating process (step A 726), the effect mode information check process related to setting of the effect mode (step A 727) ) To determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A728).

If it is determined in step A728 that the special drawing high probability is not found (step A728; N), the decoration special drawing command is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area and prepared (step A729), and the effect command setting The process (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733.
If it is determined in step A728 that the high probability of the special view is being reached (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is played In order not to make the person conscious, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Thereafter, the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A 725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A 725; N), the high probability change number updating process (step A 735), the effect mode information check process related to setting of the effect mode (step A 736) is performed to set the switching preparation remaining rotation number corresponding to the rendering mode number (step A737), and it is determined whether the rendering remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number match (step A 738). Note that the switching preparation remaining rotational speed may be a different value (rotational speed) in all the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes, or the same value in any of the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes.
When it is determined in step A 738 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (step A 738; N), special figure normal processing shift setting processing 1 (step A 741) is performed, and special drawing Finish the middle process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A 738 that the effect remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number match (step A 738; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A 739). After the processing (step A740) is performed, special processing shift processing setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and the processing of displaying the special drawing is ended. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several revolutions before the effect mode is switched, and the effect mode switching preparation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 to cross the mode. So that there is no contradiction.

[High probability change frequency update processing]
Next, the details of the high probability variation number updating process (steps A 726 and A 735) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the high probability change number of times update process, first, it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (during the high probability state) (step A751). If it is not in the special figure height probability (step A 751: N), the high probability change number of times update process is ended. If the special figure high probability is in progress (step A 751; Y), the high probability fluctuation number is updated by −1 (step A 752), and it is determined whether the high probability fluctuation number becomes “0” (step A 753) ).

If the high probability fluctuation number is not "0" (step A753; N), the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended. Also, when the high probability fluctuation number becomes "0" (step A753; Y), the high probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754), and a signal related to the high probability end (for example, 2 signals for the big hit is turned off) ) Is saved in the external information output data area.
Then, signals regarding the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation The time saving state signal is OFF, and the symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. In addition, since there is a state of "high probability & time reduction" and a state of "high probability & time reduction none", even the special drawing high probability, only the probability state changes, so the ordinary symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal and The ordinary electric role 1 open extension state signal is always off.

Next, save the number with no time saving in the game state display number area (step A757), save the common drawing low probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A758), and make special drawing in the special drawing game mode flag area. The low probability & time saving none flag is saved (step A759).
Next, save a signal (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is OFF) relating to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (step A760), and display the LED during right hitting (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57). In order to extinguish the game, the number in the left hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 761), and the high probability change number of times update process is ended.

[Demonstration mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (steps A 727 and A 736) in the above-described special view display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode shift information is a code without update (step A771). If the next mode shift information is the no update code (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process is ended. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of special view variation display games that have been executed, and for example, the effect mode which continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

  If the next mode transition information is not a no update code (step A 771; N), the effect remaining rotation number, which is the number of executable times of the special view variation display game up to the change of the effect mode, is updated by −1 (step A 772) Then, it is determined whether the effect remaining number of revolutions has become "0" (step A773). If the effect remaining number of revolutions is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is ended. If the effect remaining rotation speed becomes "0" (step A773; Y), that is, if the effect mode is to be changed from the next special image variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774) The address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A775).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), and the effect rotation number in the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotation number in the RWM It saves in the area (step A677), acquires the next mode shift information of the effect mode to be shifted, and saves it in the next mode shift information area in the RWM (step A678). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; Y), that is, if the state of the probability has not changed, the rendering mode information check process is ended.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A782), An effect command setting process (step A 782) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A783), and effect command setting processing (step A784) is performed.
Next, a high probability change frequency command corresponding to the high probability change frequency is prepared (step A 785), and effect command setting processing (step A 786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a mode to hit the left (step A 787), and if it is not a mode to hit the left (step A 787; N), the effect mode information check process is ended. If the mode is left-handed (step A 787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A 788), rendering command setting processing (step A 789) is performed, and rendering mode information check processing is ended. Do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of giving notice of switching from before the specified number of revolutions of switching of the effect mode. As described above, by managing the effect mode in the game control apparatus 100, for example, control such as generating a specific reach can be performed only in a specific effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process 1 (step A 724) in the above-described process of displaying the special view will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, in the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1, first, the processing number relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A 791), and processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A 792).

  Next, save the signal about the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, 1 big hit signal ON (big hit + small hit output), big hit 4 signal ON (big hit output)) in the external information output data area (Step A793), a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, special The symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 794). Note that, even during the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes in the ordinary drawing, so the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal motorized combination 1 open extension state signal are always off. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A795), and a number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A796). The general drawing low probability flag is saved in the area (step A 797).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high probability notification flag area is used to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit) provided on the gaming board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. Is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801). The high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of display games is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high probability state and the short time state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the effect mode 1 number is saved in the effect mode number area (step A 803), the effect remaining rotational speed area is cleared (step A 804), and the no update code is saved in the next mode shift information area (step A 805). . Then, save a signal (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is ON) relating to a right-handling instruction in the test signal output data area (step A806), and display LED during right-handing (for example, first gaming state display unit 57). In order to light up, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 807), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 is ended. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared as the special gaming state occurs.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the special figure display process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 50, in the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1, first, “7” for the small hit fanfare medium process is set as the process number (step A811), and the process number is processed as a special drawing game process. Save to the number area (step A812).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 813), a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one signal for big hit is ON (big hit + small hit output) ) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A 814), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 815).

Next, the special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step A 816), and the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A 817).
Next, a signal relating to a right-handed command (fire position designation signal 1 is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 818), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) is lit. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 819), and the small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / in-interval process (step A11) in the above-described special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902) And effect command setting processing (step A 903).

Thereafter, the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A 904), the release switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is obtained (step A 905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is the obtained release switching determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).
If the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A 906; Y), save the special opening for short opening (for example, 0.2 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 907), A special winning opening open processing transition processing setting process (step A 909) is performed, and the fanfare / in-interval processing ends.
Also, if the number of rounds is not larger than the release switching determination value (step A 906; N), save the special opening game opening time for long opening (for example, 29 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 908) The special winning opening open processing transition processing setting process (step A 909) is performed, and the fanfare / in-interval processing ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, as a big hit pattern, (1) 4R, large winning opening opening information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, large winning opening opening information 2 (all long opening), (3) 16R, large winning opening opening information 3 (1 to 4R long opening, 5 to 16R short opening), (4) 4R, large winning opening opening information 4 (all long opening), (5) 16R, large winning opening opening Information 5 (all open long), (6) 16R, big winning opening open information 6 (1-8 R long opening, 9-16 R short opening), (7) 16 R, big winning opening open information 7 (1-4 R Is set to be long open, 5 to 16 R is short open).
Therefore, in the special winning opening operation determination table, the special winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value "0", the special winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value "16", the special winning opening The release information 3 data and the release switching determination value "4", the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the release switching determination value "4", the big winning opening release information 5 data and the opening switching determination value "16" The special winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the special winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4”. Then, while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, the open operation is performed such that the open operation is short open when the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value.

[A special winning opening open process processing transition setting process]
FIG. 52 shows the process setting setting processing during large winning opening opening (step A909) in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval processing. In the special winning opening open processing transition setting process, first, set the processing number to "4" for the special winning opening opening processing (step A911), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area ( Step A 912). After that, save a signal related to the opening start of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric combination 1 operation signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step A 913) and store the number of winnings on the special winning opening. The information on the winning opening count number area is cleared (step A 914). Then, the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing is ended.

[Big winning opening open processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening open process (step A12) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, in the special winning opening open process, first, the current round is compared with the current round number in the special gaming state being executed and the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value area of RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001). Then, if it is not the final round (step A1001; N), set the special winning opening operation determination table (step A1002), acquire the release switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (step A1003), It is determined whether the number of rounds in the gaming state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1004).
If the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), save the remaining ball processing time (eg, 1.4 seconds) for the short closing in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005), Prepare an interval command related to the interval between rounds (step A1007), perform effect command setting processing (step A1010), perform the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting processing (step A1011), and the special winning opening is open. End the process.

  Also, if the number of rounds is not larger than the release switching determination value (step A1004; N), save the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1006), prepare an interval command (step A1007), perform effect command setting processing (step A1010), perform the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting processing (step A1011), and end the special winning opening open processing Do.

  On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A1001; Y), save the final remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and end the special gaming state. The ending command concerning display control etc. of the ending display screen in the case is prepared (step A1009), rendering command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, and the special winning opening residual ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, The special winning opening open processing ends.

[Large winning hole remaining ball processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 54 shows the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting processing (step A1011) in the above-mentioned special winning opening open processing. In the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting process, first, the processing number is set to "5" for the special winning opening residual ball processing (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, in order to close the open / close door 38c of the special variation winning device 38, save the off data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 38b in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023) The sphere process transition setting process is ended.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the special winning opening residual ball processing, first, the current round is compared with the current round number in the special gaming state being executed and the round number upper limit value of the RWM round number upper limit area. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

Then, if the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A1101; N), set the special winning opening operation determination table (step A1102), and obtain the opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information Then (step A1103), a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special gaming state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1105), and if the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; Y), step A1109 Transfer to processing of If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening opening information is a rank down effect type value (step A1106).

  Here, the rank down effect is a round continuation notification effect for notifying whether or not the big hit round continues, and an effect for notifying that the big hit round is not continued in the round continuation notification effect corresponds. Specifically, as a big hit pattern, "16R, big winning opening open information 2 (all long open)" and "16R, big winning opening open information 3 (1 to 4 R long open, 5 to 16 R short open)" When any of the above is selected, a predetermined big hit round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the big hit round, and the round continuation informing effect is executed at the 4Rth. If the selected jackpot pattern is "16R, big winning opening open information 2 (all open long)", round continuation is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the big winning opening is long open also in the rounds after 5R If the big hit pattern opened and selected is "16R, big winning opening opening information 3 (1 to 4 R is long opening, 5 to 16 R is short opening)", round non-continuation notification is notified in the round continuation notification effect, The big prize winning opening will be opened by short opening in the round after the 5th R eyes.

If the special winning opening information is not a rank down effect value (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. When the special winning opening information is a rank down effect value (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 4R) (step A1107).
If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. If the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), for example, if the number of rounds is 4R, an interval time (for example, 3.6 seconds) for rank down effect is set (step) A1108), the process proceeds to step A1109. In addition, the number of special rounds is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R may be provided.

  Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed, and the special winning opening residual ball processing Finish.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A1101; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area storing the effect mode when the special result is derived (step A1111), set the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the special winning opening opening information and the stop symbol pattern (step A1112), and set the ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) to the special figure game processing timer area Save (step A1113). Thereafter, the big hit end process shift setting process (step A1114) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball process is ended.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 56 shows the process transfer setting processing 2 (step A1110) during fanfare / interval in the above-mentioned special winning opening residual ball processing. In this fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 2, first, the processing number relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1122).
Next, save a signal (for example, the special electric combination 1 operating signal is OFF) relating to the open end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) in the test signal output data area (step A1123). The middle processing shift setting processing 2 ends.

[Big hit end processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 57 shows the big hit end processing shift setting process (step A1114) in the above-mentioned big winning opening residual ball process. In the big hit end process shift setting process, first, "6" is set as the process number related to the big hit end process (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132). Thereafter, a signal (for example, the special electric symbol 1 in operation is OFF) relating to the open end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133).

  Next, clear the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (step A1134), clear the information on the round number area storing the round number of the special gaming state (step A1135) ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit value area storing the upper limit value of the round number of the special gaming state (step A1136). Then, clear the information of the round number upper limit value information area storing the flag for upper limit value determination of the round number (step A1137), and of the special winning opening open information area storing the flag for opening information determination of the special winning opening The information is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit end process shift setting process is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit end process (step A14) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in the big hit end process, first, it is determined whether the time shortening determination data is time saving operation data (step A1201).
When it is not time saving operation data (step A1201; N), big hit end setting processing 1 is performed (step A 902), and when it is time saving operation data (step A1201; Y), big hit ending setting processing 2 is performed (step A903) . Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (at the time of stop symbol setting) is acquired (step A1205).

  Next, as a process of saving information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control apparatus 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (Step A1206). Furthermore, the effect mode rotational speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining speed area (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state The transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

  Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the rendering mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1210), and rendering command setting processing (step A1211) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands further including information of the rendering mode in any of “high probability, time reduction” and “high probability, no time reduction”. In the case of the present embodiment, when the big hit is over, it becomes a definite change state (so-called ST state). Therefore, as a probability information command, "high probability · time short · presentation mode A", "high probability · time short · presentation mode B" There are "High probability · Time reduction · Reproduction mode C" and "High probability · Time reduction none · Reproduction mode A", which are not used in this process, but others are "Low probability · Time reduction none · Reproduction mode A", " There are low probability, no time saving, rendering mode B, and "low probability, no time saving, rendering mode C".

Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A1212), and effect command setting processing (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high probability variation frequency command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A1214), rendering command setting processing (step A1215) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the time saving state occurs after the big hit end (step A1216) .
When the time saving state occurs after the big hit end (step A1216; Y), the special view ordinary process shift setting process 2 is performed (step A1219), and the big hit end process is ended.
In addition, when the time saving state does not occur after the big hit end (step A1216; N), prepare the left hitting indication notification command (step A1217), perform special command setting processing (step A1218), and shift to special processing routine processing The setting process 2 is performed (step A1219), and the big hit end process is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 59 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process. In this big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal regarding no time saving state (for example, 2 big hit signals are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), a signal regarding the start of high probability state and no time saving state (For example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 high probability The state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

  Next, save the number with no time saving state in the gaming state display number area (step A1223), save the common drawing low probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A1224), and save the special drawing game mode flag area. The special drawing high probability & time saving none flag are saved (step A1225). Thereafter, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number area (step A1226), and the signal related to the left hitting instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1227), in order to turn off the right hitting display LED (the first gaming state display unit 57), save the number in the left hitting state in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the big hit end setting processing 1 Finish.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 60 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process. In the big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the short time state (for example, the big hit 2 signal is ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). A signal relating to the start of the short time state is saved from inside the big hit and is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner. Then, a signal related to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 fluctuation The time reduction state signal is ON, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

  Next, save the number with time saving state in the gaming state display number area (step A1233), save the common drawing high probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A1234), and in the special drawing game mode flag area. The special drawing high probability & time saving flag are saved (step A1235). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number area (step A1256), and the big hit end setting process 2 is ended. In the case of the present embodiment, the right hitting mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right hitting mode is set from the big hit, the setting regarding the right hitting is not performed in the big hit end setting processing 2.

  That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms a specific gaming state generation means capable of generating a specific gaming state (time reduction state) over a predetermined period determined in advance after the end of the special gaming state. And in the specific gaming state, while controlling the operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 so that the winning of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is easier than when it is not the specific gaming state, than when not in the specific gaming state The first special view variation display game, the second special view variation display game, and the common view variation display game are configured to be reduced in variation time.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting process 2]
FIG. 61 shows the special figure transition processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1219) in the above-mentioned big hit end processing. In the special view routine process transition setting process 2, first, "0" is set as the process number relating to the special figure routine process (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1242) .

  After that, save the signal regarding the end of the big hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal OFF, the big hit 3 signal OFF, the big hit 4 signal OFF) in the external information output data area (step A1243), the signal about the big hit end (eg The condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operation device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Subsequently, the information of the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, clear the information of the special view game mode flag save area (step A1248), save the flag during the injustice monitoring period in the large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and set special processing shift processing 2 Finish.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 62A, in the small hit fanfare medium process, a small hit, medium process shift setting process (step A1301) is performed.

[Small hitting Medium process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit middle processing shift setting process (step A1301) in the above-described small hit fanfare medium middle processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 62 (b), in the small hitting medium process transition setting process, first, "8" for the small hit medium process is set as the process number (step A1311), and the process number is processed as a special figure game process. The file is saved in the number area (step A1312).

Next, save the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hit game in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), a signal regarding the start of the small hitting operation (for example, special electric role 1 During operation, the signal is turned ON) and saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314).
Subsequently, in order to open the open / close door 38c of the special variation winning device 38, on data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315).
Next, clear the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (step A 1316), save the small hitting operation initial value (for example, "0") in the small hitting middle control pointer area (Step A1317), the small hitting middle process transition setting process is ended.

[Small hit during processing]
Next, details of the small hit middle process (step A16) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 63, in the small hitting medium process, first, the value of the small hitting medium control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and the loaded value is not less than the small hitting operation end value (for example, “6”) Is determined (step A1402).
If the loaded value is not greater than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hitting middle control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), and the small hitting operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed. End processing during hit.

On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is in the special figure height probability. It is determined whether it is a flag related to (step A1406). Thereby, it is determined whether the small hit in the special figure height probability. Here, it does not matter whether or not the time saving state is in progress.
If the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing is ended. Also, if the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), prepare a small hit end screen command (step A1407), perform rendering command setting processing (step A1408), The small hit residual ball processing shift setting processing (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing ends.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting operation shift setting process (step A1404) in the above-mentioned small hit middle process will be described. As shown in FIG. 64, in the small hitting operation shift setting process, the branching process (step A1411) is performed according to the control pointer (small hitting middle control pointer).

If the control pointer is “0”, “2” or “4” at step A1411, the wait time (eg, 1500 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412), The off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hitting operation shift setting process is ended.
If the control pointer is "1", "3" or "5" at step A1411, the special winning opening open time (for example, 200 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A1414) The on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (Step A1415), and the small hitting operation shift setting process is ended.

Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after the small hit fanfare time of 300 ms, the opening of 200 ms and the closing of 1500 ms are alternately performed, and the small hit middle control pointer sequentially at the end of opening and at the end of closing It will be updated.
Specifically, at the end of the first 200 ms opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 ms opening to the first 1500 ms closing), the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “0,” 1 At the end of the first 1500 ms closing (that is, when switching from the first 1500 ms closing to the second 200 ms opening), the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “1”, and the second 200 ms opening is performed. The small hit middle control pointer is updated to "2" at the end, the small hit middle control pointer is updated to "3" at the end of the second 1500 ms closing, and the small hit middle control at the end of the third 200 ms open The pointer is updated to "4" and the small hit middle control pointer is updated to "5" at the end of the third 1500 ms closing. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 ms opening, the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “6”, and after the lapse of the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 ms and the small hit ending time of 100 ms thereafter, the small hit The state ends. Therefore, since it is closed for 2000 ms after the fourth 200 ms opening, the visual ending time is 2000 ms.

[Small hit residual ball processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting process (step A1409) in the above-described small hit middle process will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, in the small hit residual ball processing shift setting process, first, “9” for the small hit residual ball processing is set as the processing number (step A 1421), and the processing number is set to the special view game processing number Save to the area (step A1422).
Next, the small hit residual ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1424), small The remaining ball processing shift setting process is ended.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 66 (a), in the small hit residual ball processing, a small hit end processing shift setting process (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting end processing shift setting process (step A1501) in the above-mentioned small hit residual ball processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 66 (b), in the small hitting end process transition setting process, first, "10" according to the small hitting end process is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is processed as a special drawing game process The file is saved in the number area (step A1512).

Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal regarding the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric character 1 operating signal is turned off) Are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514).
Next, clear the information of the large winning opening count count area (step A1515), clear the information of the small hit middle control pointer area (for example, clear 0) (step A1516), and end the small hit end processing shift setting process .

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hitting end process (step A18) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the small hitting end process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag regarding special figure high probability Step A1602).
If the loaded flag is not the flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), the effect mode set at the time of start of fluctuation (at the time of stop symbol setting) The address of the table corresponding to the transition information is acquired (step A1604).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A 776), the effect remaining rotation number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotation number in the RAM The image data is saved in the area (step A1606), the next mode shift information of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired, and the next mode shift information area in the RWM is saved (step A1607). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610), An effect command setting process (step A1611) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A1612), and effect command setting processing (step A1613) is performed.
Next, a high probability change frequency command corresponding to the high probability change frequency is prepared (step A 1614), and effect command setting processing (step A 1615) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a mode to hit the left (step A1616), and if it is not a mode to hit the left (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. If the mode is the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and after the rendering command setting process (step A1618) is performed, the process of step A1619 is performed. Transition.

Then, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1619), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure time-short (time-short state) (step A1620).
If the loaded flag is a flag relating to special drawing time reduction (step A1620; Y), special drawing transition processing setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit end processing is ended.
Also, if the loaded flag is not a flag relating to special drawing time (N in step A 1620; N), save a signal relating to a left hitting instruction (for example, firing position designation signal 1 OFF) in the test signal output data area A1621), in order to turn off the display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) in the right hitting, save the number in the left hitting state in the gaming state indication number 2 area (step A1622) Processing transition setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hitting end processing is ended.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special view ordinary process shift setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above-described small hitting end process will be described. As shown in FIG. 68, in the special processing routine processing transition setting processing, first, "0" related to the special processing routine processing is set as the processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is set as the special processing game processing number area. Save (step A1632).

Next, save the signal related to the small hit end (for example, the big hit 1 signal OFF) in the external information output data area (step A1633), and the signal related to the small hit end (eg special symbol 1 small hit signal OFF) Are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634).
Next, the information of the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636), and the information of the special view game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1637).
Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special processing routine processing transition setting processing 3 is ended.

[Processing command setting process]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2001).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), the command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process for reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2004).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), the command data (ACTION) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process is ended.
The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as "command setting process".

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 70 shows symbol variation control processing (steps A20 and A22) in the special drawing game processing described above, and symbol variation control processing (step B15) in the common drawing game processing described later. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol (the first special figure, the second special figure, etc.) or the ordinary symbol (the common figure) and setting the display data of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol.

  In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag applied to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the common figure) is changing (step A2101) . In the case of this embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 (in the fluctuation control table prepared in step A19, step A21 and step B14 The address for stop) and the address for display table 1 (for variation) are defined.

If the fluctuation flag pertaining to the symbol to be controlled is fluctuating (step A2102; Y), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2103). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21 and step B14.
Next, the blinking control timer to be controlled is updated by -1 (step A2104), and it is determined whether the updated blinking control timer is "0" (step A2105), and the updated blinking control timer is "0". If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  Also, when the blinking control timer after updating is "0" (step A2105; Y), the blinking control timer initial value corresponding to the target blinking timer area is saved (step A2106), and the variation symbol number of the control object Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

On the other hand, when the changing flag concerning the symbol to be controlled is not changing (step A2102; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2109). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21 and step B14.
Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  The blinking control timer initial value saved in step A2106 is a value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. Here, a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the blinking control timer initial value in the variation control table of the first special figure (first special figure variation display game), and the second special figure (second special figure variation display game) A value corresponding to 104 ms is defined as the blinking control timer initial value in the fluctuation control table of), and a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the blinking control timer initial value in the fluctuation control table of the common drawing (generally drawn fluctuation display game) It is done. The blinking control timer initial value is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the fluctuation time.

  Further, the corresponding range in step A2107 is defined by the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variation symbol number reaches the upper limit value by updating the variation symbol number by +1 in step A2107, the variation symbol number is set to 0, and the variation symbol number is 0 to 0 (variation symbol number upper limit judgment value -1 It is updated sequentially in the range of). In steps A2108 and A2111, display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the fluctuation symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value. Will be repeatedly displayed.

  Here, 8 is defined as the variation symbol number upper limit judgment value in the variation control table of the first special figure (first special figure variation display game), and the variation symbol number can be updated in the range of 0-7. Therefore, the special figure 1 in-varying display which is repeatedly displayed during the variation display of the first special figure variation display game makes a round with updating of the lighting pattern of eight times. In addition, 2 is defined as the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value in the fluctuation control table of the second special figure (the second special figure fluctuation display game), and the fluctuation symbol numbers can be updated alternately with 0 and 1. Therefore, the special figure 2 in-varying display which is repeatedly displayed during the variable indication of the second special figure variation display game makes a round with updating of the lighting patterns of two times. Further, 4 is defined as the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value in the fluctuation control table of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation display game), and the fluctuation symbol number can be updated in the range of 0-3. Therefore, the common drawing in-progress display, which is repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the common drawing change display game, makes one round of four lighting pattern updates.

  By defining the blinking control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed as described above, the interval and the display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 are round The number of updates to be made can be set for each game.

[Distribution process]
FIG. 71 shows the distribution process (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting process. In the distribution process, the latter half variation selection table of the special view variation display game is selected from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, or the second half variation selection table is selected based on the variation pattern random number 2. In the process for selecting the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number) or selecting the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. is there.

  In this distribution process, first, the head data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in step A472, the latter half variation selection table prepared in step A477, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A483) Is checked if it is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (step A2201). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number) or first half variation pattern (first half variation number) In the case of a selection table that stores the distribution value of, but does not require distribution, the distribution value "0", that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top.

Then, if the head data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table or first half fluctuation selection table) is a code without distribution (step A2202; Y), the data corresponding to the distributed result The address is updated (step A2207), and the distribution process is ended.
On the other hand, when the first data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table or first half fluctuation selection table) is not a code without distribution (step A2202; N), the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table) And one distribution value defined first in the latter half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table) (step A2203).

  Subsequently, the distributed value acquired in step A2203 is subtracted from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2 or fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in step A473, A478 or A484, and a new random number value is calculated. Is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203 and the subsequent steps Do the processing.

That is, the distribution value defined next in the target selection table (the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (step A2203), and then it is determined in the previous step A2205. A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205).
The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y). Thereby, at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number) or first half variation pattern (first half variation pattern) defined in the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table or first half variation selection table) Any one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number) and the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from the variation numbers).
Then, if it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A2207), and the distribution processing is ended. Do.

[2-byte distribution process]
FIG. 72 shows 2-byte distribution processing (step A475) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting processing. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the top data in the selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in step A 472) is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (step A2301). Here, although the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, the second half specifies only the second half fluctuation selection table in which the second half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the fluctuation group table (for example, a part of fluctuation group table when the result is out), since there is no need to distribute, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the head .

Then, if the first data in the selection table (second-half variation group table) is a code without distribution (step A2302; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step A2307). End the distribution process.
On the other hand, if the first data in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A2302; N), one distribution value first defined in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is acquired (Step A2303).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2303 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A473 (step A2304), and the calculated new randomness It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than "0" (step A2305). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step A2305; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), the process proceeds to step A2303 and the subsequent steps Do the processing.
That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is acquired (step A2303), and then the distribution value is newly subtracted by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value determined in the previous step A2305. A random number value is calculated (step A2304), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305).

The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y). Thereby, any one second half fluctuation selection table is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table).
When it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A2307), and 2-byte distribution processing is performed. Finish.
The configuration of the distribution process shown in FIG. 71 and the configuration of the 2-byte distribution process shown in FIG. 72 are basically the same, but whether the size of the random number used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes? Because they differ in that, the program instructions to calculate are different.

[Puppet game processing]
Next, details of the common-play game process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the common drawing game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 34a, control of the entire processing concerning the common drawing variation display game, setting of display of common drawing, and the like are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in the common-play game processing, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general prize winning switch for monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the common-play game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the common drawing game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the common drawing game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

  If it is determined that the value of the common-play game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, it is determined that the time-up or time-up has already occurred, reference is made to branch to the processing corresponding to the common-play game processing number The routine drawing game sequence branch table is set in the register (step B5), and the table is used to obtain the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the regular drawing game process number (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the common drawing game process number (step B7).

In step B7, when the popular drawing game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the common drawing fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of fluctuation start of the common drawing fluctuation display game and the setting of the effect, or The ordinary drawing process (step B8) is performed to set information necessary for performing the process.
If the drawing game processing number is “1” in step B7, a drawing change processing (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the drawing display processing.

In addition, if the result of the common drawing variation display game is a hit when the common drawing game processing number is "2" in step B7, the setting of the common charge open time according to whether or not the time saving state is being performed. In addition, the general drawing display processing (step B10) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common processing per processing.
In addition, if the common drawing game processing number is "3" in step B7, then the common drawing is continued during the common drawing, or the common drawing is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common electric residual ball processing, etc. A process (step B11) is performed.

In step B7, if the common drawing game process number is "4", general electric remaining ball processing (step B12) is performed to set information required for performing the common drawing end processing.
If the drawing game processing number is "5" in step B7, the drawing drawing end processing (step B13) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the drawing common processing.

Then, after preparing the common drawing fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the common drawing display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the common symbol by the common drawing display (step B15) ), And end the common drawing game processing.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B4 that the value of the common-play game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described common game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, if there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether the game state (for example, during the big hit, during the small hit, during the special view time, during the common charge support) (Step B102).
When it is a game state to hit the right (step B102; Y), it is determined whether the common drawing reservation number is obtained and the general drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105). If the game state is not right-handed (step B102; N), a left-handed command is prepared (step B103), and the rendering command setting process (step B104) is performed, and then the common drawing reserve number is acquired. It is determined whether the number of general drawing reservations is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105).

  If the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the common drawing reservation number is updated by 1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated common drawing reservation number is calculated. (Step B107). Then, the random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (step B108), and the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit symbol random number storage area (step B109). Finish.

  If it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or if it is determined in step B105 that the number of general drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (step B105; N), End the gate switch monitoring process. That is, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the gaming ball at the common drawing start gate 34, and stores the predetermined number as the starting memory which becomes the right to execute the common drawing variation display game. Make a starting memory means.

[Puden prize winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the common prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described common drawing game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the general competition winning switch monitoring process, first, whether it is in the common drawing, that is, the common drawing fluctuation display game is hit and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times It is determined whether there is any (step B201). Then, if the drawing is in the middle (step B201; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202) and there is an input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y) If it is determined, the count number of the common charge counter is updated by 1 (step B203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated common charge counter is the upper limit value (for example, "6") or more (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is the upper limit value or more (step B204; Y) Then, hit the control pointer area in the common drawing and save the operation end value (for example, "4") (step B205), clear the common drawing game processing timer to 0 (step B206), and execute the general electric winning switch monitoring process finish. That is, when there is a routine power prize higher than the upper limit value in the hit state of the common drawing, the hit state of the common drawing is ended halfway at that point.

  If it is determined in step B201 that a per figure drawing is not in progress (step B201; N), if it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. When it is determined that the common charge count number is not the upper limit value or more (step B204; N), the common match winning switch monitoring process is ended.

[Normal figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing (step B8) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in the ordinary drawing routine processing, first, it is judged whether the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B301), and the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B201; Y ) Performs ordinary drawing transition processing transition setting processing 1 (step B321), and ends ordinary circulation processing. Also, if the common drawing reservation number is not "0" (step B301; N), load random numbers from the RWM hit random number storage area (for the hold number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for the hold number 1) ( Step B302), clear random number storage area (for holding number 1), touch symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step B303), and the probability of hit results in a common drawing variation display game is normal It is determined whether it is in the common map high probability raised higher than the probability (that is, the common map low probability), ie, in the short time state (step B304).

If the drawing probability is not in the high probability (step B304; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower judgment value) in the low probability of the drawing is set (step B305). ; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the general drawing high probability (step B306).
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B307). If the value of the random number is not greater than or equal to the upper judgment value (step B307; N), the value of the random number is determined to be B305 or B306. It is determined whether it is less than the lower limit judgment value set (step B308).

If the value of the per-random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B307; Y) or if the value of the per-random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; Y), the per-flag In the area, save the deviation information (step B309), set the out-of-stop symbol number (step B310), save the out-of-pattern information in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B311), stop the common symbol number stop Save to the symbol area (step B315).
On the other hand, if the value of the random number per hit is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B312) and the load loaded in step B302 The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B313), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B314), and the stop symbol number is common drawing stop symbol Save to the area (step B315).

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at low probability is 0/251, the probability of hitting at high probability is 250/251, the upper judgment value is “251”, and the low probability judgment value is “251”, the high probability lower limit judgment value is “1”.
Therefore, at the time of the general drawing low probability, the value of the hit random number deviates in all cases of “0” to “250”.
Further, at the time of the drawing normal probability, the case where the value of the hit random number is any of “1” to “250” is present, and the case where the value of the hit random number is “0” is not.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol area (step 315), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316).
Thereafter, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B317), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B318), and the common drawing reserve number is updated by -1 (step B319). That is, with the common drawing variation display game regarding the oldest common drawing reservation number 1 being executed, the processing of raising the positions of the common drawing reservation numbers 2 to 4 held by the common drawing reservation number 1 or later one by one I do. As a result of this processing, the values for the number of general drawing reservations 2 to from the number of general drawing reservations 4 for the random number storage area per common drawing move from the number 1 for general drawing reservations for the random number storage area to It will be done. Then, the value for the common drawing reservation number 4 of the random number storage area per common drawing is cleared, and the common drawing reservation number is decremented by one.
Then, the general drawing variation processing transition setting process (step B320) is performed, and the general drawing routine processing is ended. That is, the game execution means for the game control device 100 to execute the common view change display game as the variable display game (based on the common view start storage) based on the detection of the gaming ball in the common view start gate 34 (inflow area). I

[General drawing normal processing transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 77 shows the ordinary drawing transition process transition setting process 1 (step B 321) in the ordinary drawing routine process described above and the ordinary drawing transition process transition setting process 1 (step B 508) in the ordinary drawing display process described later. . In this common drawing routine processing transition setting processing 1, first, "0" is set as a processing number for moving to common drawing normal processing (step B331), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (step B332). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B333), and the routine diagram transition processing setting processing 1 ends.

[Processing setting setting process during general drawing fluctuation]
FIG. 78 shows the processing shift setting processing (step B320) during the common drawing fluctuation processing in the common drawing normal processing described above. In this common drawing fluctuating process transition setting process, first, “1” is set as a processing number for shifting to the common drawing fluctuating process (step B 341), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area ( Step B342).
After that, the common drawing fluctuation time (for example, 500 ms. In the case of this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation time is common between the common drawing low probability state and the common drawing high probability state) Save (step B343), save the signal related to the start of the common drawing fluctuation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step B344), and change the common drawing fluctuation display game A floating flag indicating medium is saved in the common drawing fluctuation control flag area (step B345).
Then, save the blinking control timer initial value (here, 52 ms), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the common drawing indicator, in the common drawing blinking control timer area (step B346) Finish.

[During processing of common map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general drawing fluctuation processing (step B9) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 79 (a), in the general-diagram variation processing, a general-diagram-display processing transition setting process (step B401) is performed.

[Processing transition setting processing during common map display]
Next, the details of the processing for setting transition to general processing during general display during the above processing of general fluctuation are described (step B401). As shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the processing for setting transition to general processing, first, the processing number is set to "2" as setting processing for transitioning to processing during general display (step B411), The number is saved in the common drawing game process number area (step B412). Thereafter, the common drawing display time (for example, 600 ms) which is the display time of the common drawing fluctuation display game result in the common drawing indicator is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B413). (For example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B414), and the stop flag indicating that the common drawing fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the common drawing fluctuation control flag area Then (step B415), the processing transition setting processing during the display of the general drawing is ended.

[Process while displaying a common map]
Next, details of the common drawing display processing (step B10) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 80, in the processing for displaying the common drawing, first, the hit flag (hit information or out information) set in the common processing is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of RWM is cleared. Then (step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

If the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), the common drawing routine processing transition setting processing 1 (step B508) for moving to the common drawing normal processing is performed, and the common drawing display processing is ended.
On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B 503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B 504), and the hit start pointer value (eg, “0 ",""2" or "4") is obtained and saved in the control pointer area during the drawing (step B505). Next, a general power release time (for example, 500 msec or 1700 ms) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B506). Thereafter, the processing transition setting processing (step B211) is performed per common drawing, and the common drawing display processing is ended.

[Per process of processing transition setting processing per common map]
FIG. 81 shows the processing transition setting processing (step B507) per common drawing in the above-described processing of displaying the common drawing. In this processing per process setting processing, first, "3" is set as a processing number for processing transition to processing per common drawing (step B511), and the processing number is saved in the general processing game processing number area. (Step B512). After that, test signal output data for the signal related to the hit of the common drawing fluctuation display game (for example, the signal during normal symbol 1 is ON) and the signal for the start of power operation (for example, the signal for ordinary electric character 1 operation is ON) In order to save in the area (step B513) and output a signal for driving (turning on) the common voltage solenoid, the on data is saved in the common voltage solenoid output data area (step B514).

  Further, the information of the common charge count number area storing the number of winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is cleared (step B515), and the general electric number storing the winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the regular monitoring period The information on the incorrect winning number area is cleared (step B516). Then, a flag (outside of fraud monitoring period flag) defining out of fraud monitoring period of normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is saved in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B 517), and the processing transition setting processing is completed per common drawing. Do.

[Every time per popular map]
Next, the details of the common drawing in the common drawing game process (step B11) will be described. As shown in FIG. 82, in the middle processing per normal drawing, first, the middle control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the control pointer per common drawing loaded is equal to or more than the upper limit It is determined (step B602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer in the common drawing is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step B602; N), the control pointer in the common drawing is updated by +1 (step B603), and Go and finish the process during the popular map.
If the value of the control pointer during the common drawing is greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; Y), then the general processing shift is performed without performing processing of updating the processing control pointer area during the common drawing by +1 in step B603. The setting process (step B604) is performed, and the process is ended during the common drawing.

[Puppet operation transition setting process]
FIG. 83 shows the general-purpose power transition setting process (step B604) in the above-mentioned per-normal-period process. The routine operation shift setting process is a process for controlling the drive of the routine power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (general control pointer). It is like that. In this routine operation transition setting process, first, a branch process is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B611).

  If the value of the control pointer is “0” or “2”, the process proceeds to step B 612 to control the closing of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, so after the closing of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 corresponding to the control pointer Saves the off time in the common power solenoid output data area (step B613), and sets the common power operation shift to save the wait time of the general game processing timer area (step B612) and turn off the common power solenoid 37c. End the process.

  If the value of the control pointer is “1” or “3”, the process proceeds to step B 614 to control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so that the normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer In order to save the general power release time, which is the open time, in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B614) and turn on the general power solenoid 37c, save the on data in the general power solenoid output data area (step B615) Ends the routine operation transition setting process.

  If the value of the control pointer is "4", the process proceeds to step B616 to end the release control of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 and perform the general electric power remaining ball processing, so "4" as the processing number Are set (step B 616). Then, the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (step B617), and the general electric power remaining ball processing time is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B619). Thereafter, in order to turn off the common solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (step B619), and the common power operation transition setting process is ended.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, a weight time of 200 ms is saved in step B612, 1700 ms is saved in step B614 as the common charge release time, and 600 ms is saved in step B618 as the common charge residual ball processing time. .
Furthermore, when the stop figure symbol is “per hit symbol 1”, “4” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the during stop processing shown in FIG. In step B506, "500 ms" is acquired as the general power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 ms, since the release time of the general power is "500 ms", the normal power (normal fluctuation winning device 37) opens for 500 ms, and then the control pointer is "4" Therefore, the general charge residual ball processing time of 600 ms is set.
Also, if the stop figure symbol is "per hit symbol 2", "2" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the during stop processing shown in FIG. In step B506, “1700 milliseconds” is acquired as the general power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 ms, since the release time of the common charge is "1700 ms", the common charge is released for 1700 ms, and then the weight of 200 ms is kept since the control pointer is "2" Since the time is set and then the control pointer is updated to "3" during the normal drawing, the power is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer is updated to "4" during the normal drawing, 600 ms of The normal charge residual ball processing time is set.
Further, if the stop figure symbol is “per hit symbol 3”, “0” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the processing during the limit map display shown in FIG. In step B506, “1700 milliseconds” is acquired as the general power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 ms, since the PV release time is "1700 ms", the PV is released for 1700 ms, and thereafter, since the control pointer is "0", the weight of 200 ms is waited. The time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "1" during the normal drawing, and the general power is released for 1700 ms, and then 200 ms since the control pointer during the expansion is updated to "2". The wait time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "3" during the general drawing, and the general power is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer is updated to "4" during the general drawing, 600 ms. The normal charge residual ball processing time is set.

[Puden residual ball treatment]
Next, the details of the routine charge remaining ball processing (step B12) in the above-described regular game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 (a), in the generalization residual ball processing, the end processing shift setting processing (step B701) is performed per common drawing.

[Process for setting end processing transition per common drawing]
Next, the details of the processing for shifting to the end processing shift setting processing (step B701) in the above-described normal charge residual ball processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 (b), in the processing for setting end processing per common drawing, first, the processing number "5" related to the end processing per common drawing is set (step B711), and the processing number The file is saved in the processing number area (step B712).

  Thereafter, the common drawing ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B 713), and a signal related to the operation termination of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (for example, the normal electric character 1 operation signal OFF) Are saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the common charge count number area for counting the number of prizes for the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is cleared (step B715). Then, the control pointer area in the common drawing is cleared (step B716), and the processing for setting the end processing per common drawing is ended.

[End processing per popular map]
Next, the details of the end-of-round-figure end process (step B13) in the above-mentioned ordinary-figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 85 (a), in the end processing per common drawing, common processing normal processing shift setting processing 2 (step B801) is performed.

[General drawing normal processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing transition setting processing 2 (step B801) in the above-described common drawing end processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 85 (b), in the ordinary drawing normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “0” related to the ordinary drawing normal process is set (step B811), and the process number is set to the ordinary drawing game process Save in the number area (step B812).

  After that, save the signal (for example, the signal is turned off during the normal symbol 1) to the test signal output data area (step B 813) and define the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The flag (during fraud monitoring period flag) is saved in the routine power transmission fraud monitoring period flag area (step B 814), and the routine drawing transition processing setting process 2 is ended.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S111) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special view 1 reserve display 54, the special view 2 reserve display 55, the general drawing reserve display 56, the first gaming state display unit 57, and the second gaming state display provided in the collective display device 50. The section 58 performs settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the round display section 60.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blink display timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and whether or not the output of a specific bit in the blink display timer area is on (whether it is 1). Is determined (step S502). The blinking display timer of the present embodiment is configured by performing a +1 update in timer interrupt processing performed every 4 ms using an 8-bit blinking display timer area. In this segment LED editing process, it is determined whether the output of the bit 5 in the blinking display timer area is on timing (is 1). Since the value of bit 5 is switched between 0 and 1 every 128 ms, it is possible to control turn-off and turn-on in units of 128 ms. Of course, it is also possible to control turning off and on in units of shorter or longer time with reference to other bits.

If the output is on timing (step S502; Y), the common drawing reservation number display table 1 is set among the common drawing reservation number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode in the common drawing reservation display is defined. (Step S503) When it is not the output on timing (Step S502; N), the common drawing reserve number display table 2 is set (Step S504).
Then, display data corresponding to the common drawing reservation number is acquired from the set common drawing reservation number display table and saved in the segment area of the common drawing reservation display unit (step S505). In the present embodiment, if the common drawing reserve number is any one of “0” to “2”, the display data becomes the same regardless of which common drawing reserve number display table is set.

Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S506), and in the case of the output on timing (step S506; Y), the special figure 1 reserve number in which the display mode on the special figure 1 reserve indicator is defined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold count display table 1 is set (step S507), and when it is not the output on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 hold count display table 2 is set (step S506) Step S508).
Then, display data corresponding to the special drawing 1 holding number is acquired from the set special drawing 1 holding number display table, and saved in the segment area of the special drawing 1 holding display (step S 509).

Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S510), and in the case of the output on timing (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 reserve number display in which the display mode on the special view 2 reserve indicator is defined. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 pending number display table 1 is set (step S511), and when it is not the output on timing (step S510; N), the special figure 2 pending number display table 2 is set (step S510) S512).
Then, display data corresponding to the special drawing 2 holding number is acquired from the set special drawing 2 holding number display table and saved in the segment area of the special drawing 2 holding display (step S513).
Furthermore, a round display table in which the display mode in the round display unit is defined is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the round display unit (step S515). ).

Next, the game state display table 1 is set in which the display mode in the second game state display unit 58 that lights up when the time saving state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time saving state (step S516) The display data corresponding to is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second gaming state display unit 58 (step S517). In the present embodiment, the second gaming state display unit 58 consisting of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal operation and to be turned on during the special view time (during common power support).
Thereafter, the gaming state display table 2 is set in which the display mode in the first gaming state display section 57 is informed that the gaming state is more advantageous to the right hitting than the left hitting (step S518). The display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit 57 (step S519), and the segment LED editing process is ended. In the present embodiment, the first gaming state display unit 57 consisting of one LED is turned off at the time of normal hitting (left hitting) and right hitting (in the case of the present embodiment, big hit, small hit, medium power support) Medium) is configured to light up.
That is, the special view 1 reserve display 54, the special view 2 reserve display 55, and the common view reserve display 56 constitute start storage display means for displaying the information of the start storage stored in the start storage means. Further, the game control device 100 serves as start storage display control means for controlling display on the start storage display means.

  FIG. 87 (a) shows the display modes of the special view 1 reserve display 54, the special view 2 reserve display 55, and the common view reserve display 56. Each display unit is configured to display the number of reservations by two light emitting units. In the case of the number of reservations 0, any one is turned off, in the case of number 1 the one is turned off and the other one is lit. In the case of the number of holdings 3, one is lit and the other blinks, and in the case of the number of holdings 4, both are blinked.

  Such a display mode is selected by alternately selecting the table every 128 ms by selecting the number-of-holds display tables 1 and 2 according to the value of bit 5 of the blinking display timer area as described above. This is realized by setting the corresponding display mode in the table with reference to the current number of reservations. FIG. 87 (b) shows the contents of the number-of-holds display tables 1 and 2. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the display mode corresponding to the number of reservations is the same in each display, and the contents of the number-of-holdings display table are also the same. Here, the light emitting unit 1 corresponds to D9, D11, and D31, and the light emitting unit 2 corresponds to D10, D12, and D32.

  For example, in the case of the number of holdings 1, the light-emitting unit 1 is turned off by selecting both of the holding display tables 1 and 2 and turned off, and the light-emitting unit 2 is selected by lighting both holding displays 1 and 2 It becomes a lighting state by doing. Further, in the case of the number of holdings 3, the lighting of the light emitting unit 1 is selected by lighting both in the holding display tables 1 and 2 and the lighting state is achieved. For the light emitting unit 2, lighting is selected in the hold display table 1, and in the holding display table 2, turning off is selected, so that the light emitting unit 2 is in a blinking state in which lighting and turning off are repeated every 128 ms.

  That is, if the value of the blinking display timer is in a predetermined off range (here, the range of bit 5 is 0) in the case of blinking, it is off and is outside the range of off (here, the range of bit 5 is 1) Make it light if there is. Further, the turn-off range in the case where the display mode of at least the special view 1 reserve display 54 and the special view 2 reserve display 55 is in the blinking state is a common range, and here the blink mode in the display mode of the common view reserve display 56 The turn-off range in the case of the state is also a common range.

  Furthermore, the blinking display timer is constantly updated, and the blinking display timer is not reset or another value is not set even if the number of holding changes. Therefore, when shifting to the blinking state, the light emitting state is either on or off according to the value of the blinking display timer in the segment LED editing process for the first time after the number of holding changes. For example, the light emitting unit 1 changes from the lighting state to the blinking state for the light emitting unit 1 when the number of holding changes to 3 and the value of the blinking display timer when changing changes the value for selecting the holding display table 1 (bit 5 is If it is 1), the lighting is continued, and if it is the value for selecting the hold display table 2 (bit 5 is 0), it is turned off immediately.

  By controlling the light emission mode as described above, the blinking timing is synchronized between the light emitting unit 1 and the light emitting unit 2, and the visibility of the display and the decorativeness are enhanced. Furthermore, the timings of blinking in the special view 1 reserve display 54, the special view 2 reserve display 55, and the general view reserve display 56 are also synchronized, and the visibility and decoration of the display are further enhanced. In addition, the blinking control of the plurality of light emitting units can be performed by one blinking display timer, and the burden of control can be reduced. That is, the batch display device 50 is an information display device that displays information about a game by a light emitter, and the game control device 100 lights up with an information display device control unit that controls the information display device and a light off period in a blinking state. Make a blinking display timer for controlling the period.

  In addition, when the number of reservations changes and shifts from blinking to lighting, the value of the blinking display timer is the value that selects the suspension display table 1 in the first segment LED editing process after the number of reservations changes (bit If 5 is 1), lighting is continued, and if it is a value for selecting the hold display table 2 (bit 5 is 0), it is immediately changed from lighting to lighting. That is, when the blinking state ends, if the current light emitting state is different from the transitioned light emitting state, the light emitting state is immediately changed. In this case, there is no case of transition from the blinking state to the extinguished state, but if there is such a transition, extinguishing is maintained if the current light emitting state is extinguished as described above, and the current light emitting state is If it is on, it will be changed to off immediately.

  From the above, on the gaming machine which executes the game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition and the result of the game is a special result, the game machine generates a state advantageous to the player The information display device (collective display device 50) for displaying information related to the game by the body and the information display device control means (game control device 100) for controlling the information display device, the information display device control means Information on the game is displayed by controlling the light emitter in any one or both of the lighting state and the lighting state and the lighting state, and a period in which the lighting is turned off and a period in which the lighting is on and Is provided with a blinking display timer (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game, and when the blinking state is set, the value of the blinking display timer is extinguished if it is within the predetermined extinguishing range, and the predetermined extinguishing range is extinguished. It is configured to be controlled to light up if it is outside, constantly updates the blinking display timer regardless of whether it is blinking or not, and when the blinking state is started, It will be started from the light emission state according to the value. Therefore, processing such as setting or resetting the timer value is not necessary at the transition to the blinking state or the transition from the blinking state, and the control load can be reduced.

  In addition, the start memory which becomes the right to execute the game based on the detection of the game ball in the flow area where the flow of game balls can be detected (the start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the common drawing start gate 34) And a game execution unit (game control apparatus 100) for executing a game based on the start storage stored in the start storage unit, The area includes a first inflow area and a second inflow area, and the start storage means stores the first start memory as the start storage based on the detection of the gaming ball in the first inflow area, and the second inflow The second starting memory is stored as the starting memory based on the detection of the gaming ball in the area, and the game execution means executes the first game based on the first starting memory, and the second starting memory is based on the second starting memory. Configured to run the game The information display device control means (game control device 100) displays the number of first start memories on the first display section of the information display device (collective display device 50), and the number of second start memories is information It is displayed on the second display unit of the display device, and the blinking state is controlled using the common blink display timer in the first display unit and the second display unit. Therefore, since a common blink display timer can be used by a plurality of display units, the burden of control can be reduced. In addition, the blinking state can be synchronized with a plurality of display portions, and the decorativeness and the visibility can be improved.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first inflow area and the second inflow area are two selected from among the start winning hole 36, the normal change winning device 37, and the common drawing start gate 34. The first start memory and the second start memory are start memories corresponding to the selected two inflow areas, and two of the first start memory, the second start memory, and the common start memory. It is. Further, the first game and the second game are games corresponding to the selected two inflow areas, and are a first special view variation display game, a second special view variation display game, and a common view variation display game. Two of them. Further, the first display unit and the second display unit are display units corresponding to the selected two inflow areas, and the special view 1 suspension display 54, the special view 2 suspension display 55, and the general view suspension display Two out of fifty-six.

  In addition, the information display device control means (game control device 100) is configured to set the predetermined turn-off range as the common range in the first display unit and the second display unit. Therefore, the blinking state can be synchronized by the plurality of display units, and the decorativeness and the visibility can be improved.

  Further, when the blinking state ends, if the current light emitting state is different from the light emitting state to be transitioned, the light emitting state is immediately changed. Therefore, it is possible to immediately notify the player of the change in state.

  In the special figure 1 reserve display 54, the special figure 2 reserve indicator 55, and the common view reserve indicator 56, it is assumed that the blink state is displayed using a common blink display timer, but other than this in the collective display device 50 The special display 1 (special display 1 display 51, special display 2 display 52, general drawing display 53, first gaming state display unit 57, second gaming state display unit 58, round display unit 60, etc.) also blinks In this case, the blinking state may be controlled using a common blinking display timer, and the blinking states may be synchronized with each other.

  Also, by setting the contents of the hold display table of the special view 1 hold display 54, the special view 2 hold display 55, and the common view hold display 56, various lighting modes of the respective hold displays can be configured. And the hold display can be related to each other. For example, in the special view 1 suspension display 54 and the special view 2 suspension display 55, the on / off periods of the blinking state may be reversed. Since the blinking display timer is common, when both display units are in the blinking state, they are alternately turned on to improve visibility and decoration.

  In addition, when the light emission state transitions to the blink state or shifts from the blink state, if the light emission state in the blink state based on the value of the blink display timer does not change before and after the transition, the light emission state is temporarily changed to different You may For example, when it is the timing when the light emission state based on the value of the blink display timer in the blink state becomes the light state when transitioning from the light state to the blink state, the light is temporarily turned off along with the transition. . In addition, when the light emission state based on the value of the blink display timer in the blinking state is the lighted state when transitioning from the blinking state to the lighting state, the light is temporarily turned off along with the transition. . The time to be temporarily changed can be arbitrarily set, and if it is shorter than 128 ms which is the switching time of the blinking state, short blinking occurs when shifting to the blinking state, and the visibility is enhanced.

  Also, although the flashing cycle is 128 ms, it is not limited to this. In particular, by shortening the blinking cycle, it is possible to shorten the time until the transition can be recognized when transitioning to the blinking state or transitioning from the blinking state. Further, in the predetermined period in which the light emission state has shifted to the blinking state, the blinking period may be set shorter than the other periods.

  Further, in the above control, data to be set in the segment area is set by switching the hold display table to be referred to, but the information of the number of starting memories and the information of the blinking display timer are not referred to Data may be set directly to the segment area on the basis of this.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and the end of fraud notification are set.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal. It is determined whether or not magnetism is detected (step S601). If the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (step S602). It is determined whether the time is up (step S603). In the case of the present embodiment, when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 ms or more, it is determined that time is up.

  If the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step S603; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60 seconds is saved in the magnet fraud alert timer area (step S605). Then, a command for magnet informing notification is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a predetermined period (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality occurs.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud specifying the notification time of the magnet fraud If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). In addition, the minimum value of the magnet fraud alerting | reporting timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is "0" (step S610). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is not time-up (step S603; N), it transfers to the process of step S609.

  Then, if the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is not "0" (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. Also, if the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is "0" (step S610; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time is up, and the fraud alert period ends, or from the beginning it is fraudulent If the notification has not been made, a command for magnet notification end is prepared (step S611). Furthermore, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

Then, if the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), and rendering command setting processing is performed. Then (step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended.
Here, “step S601; N” → “step S608” → “step S609” → “step S610; Y” → “step S611” → “step S612” → “step S613; Y” are normal routes.

[Board radio wave fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, and the start and the end of the fraud notification are set.

  As shown in FIG. 89, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, It is determined whether the board radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). If the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value (for example, 60 seconds) of the radio wave fraud alert timer is saved in the radio wave fraud alert timer area (step S702).

  Then, prepare a command of board radio wave fraud notification (step S703), prepare a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S704), and prepare the prepared board radio wave fraud flag with the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times, while in the case of board radio wave fraud, the board radio sensor 62 is detected once. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred at the time of

  On the other hand, if the board radio wave sensor 62 is not on (step S 701; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer defining the notification time of radio wave fraud is not “0” −1 It updates (step S705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is "0" (step S706).

  If the value of the radio wave injustice timer is not “0” (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave improper monitoring process is ended. If the value of the radio wave informing timer is "0" (step S706; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time has already been up, and the period of the informing notification ends, or from the beginning it is incorrect. If the notification has not been made, prepare a command to terminate the board radio wave illegal notification (step S 707), prepare a board radio wave illegality cancellation flag as the board radio wave illegality flag (step S 708), and the prepared board radio wave illegality flag It is determined whether the value of the board radio wave illegal flag area matches (step S709).

Then, if the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing is ended. If the prepared board radio wave illegal flag does not match the value of the board radio wave illegal flag area (step S709; N), the prepared board radio wave illegal flag is saved in the board radio wave illegal flag area (step S710), and the rendering command The setting process is performed (step S711), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is ended.
Here, “step S701; N” → “step S705” → “step S706; Y” → “step S707” → “step S708” → “step S709; Y” are normal routes.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S105), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112), and board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) Based on the information collecting terminal, external equipment such as the game arcade internal management device, and information to be output to the test shot testing device, processing is performed to set in the output buffer.

As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, in the external information editing process, first, no glass frame opening error occurs (step S801; N) and no main body frame opening error occurs (step S802; N) The off data of the door / frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. .
On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y) or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the on data of the door / frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer, which measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch or the like, is updated by -1 unless it is "0". Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set at the time of setting the initial value of the RAM when activated by clearing the RAM in the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809). Transfer to processing of If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S 808; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the process of step S 810 is not performed and the process of step S 810 is performed. Transition.

  Then, if the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), if the board radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), if the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), If the fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), or if the big winning opening fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area ( Step S816) The on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817), and the process proceeds to step S818. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

  On the other hand, there is no magnet fraud (step S 810; N), no board radio fraud (step S 811; N), no frame radio fraud (step S 812; N), no generation of general electricity fraud (Step S813; N) If it is not even the occurrence of the big winning opening fraud (Step S814; N), the off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (Step S815). Transfer to processing.

Then, main prize ball signal editing processing (step S 818) is performed to set information on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out, and starting opening signal editing processing (step S 819) is performed to edit the winning opening signal of the starting opening.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S 820). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is "0" (step S821).

If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S821; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area Then, the external information editing process is ended (step S822).
Also, if the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S821; N), that is, if the time is not up, save the on data of the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area (step S823), the external information editing process is ended.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S 818) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The main prize ball signal editing process externally generates the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (predetermined number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening becomes a predetermined number (10 in the case of this embodiment). It is processing to output to the device.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of times the main prize ball signal output is "0" (step S833).

Then, if the main prize ball signal output number is not "0" (step S833; N), the main prize ball signal output number is updated by -1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal control timer area is displayed. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S 835). The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is the time between the on state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal (for example, 128 ms) and the time for the off state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 ms) It is an on-state time (for example, 128 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.
If the main prize ball signal output count is "0" (step S833; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838) The main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0" (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period is that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0". If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S 836; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

In the present embodiment, a main prize ball signal is output from the game control device 100 every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out becomes 10, and the payout control device 200 comes to have 10 game balls paid out. A main prize ball signal is output each time.
Specifically, the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball number signal output frequency by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every 10 payout schedules (every time the payout command is transmitted), and updates (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) The main prize ball signal is output as many times as the number of outputs set.
Since the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 pieces of payout are actually performed for the main prize ball signal outputted for each schedule, the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to respond to fraudulent withdrawals. In addition, even if you win during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to a lack of balls, etc., and even if it is paid out after the big hit, the hall computer (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judged).

[Starting mouth signal editing process]
Next, details of the starting opening signal editing process (step S819) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The start opening signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 93, in the starting opening signal editing process, first, if the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S841). The minimum value of the starting opening signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842). When the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of starting opening signal output is "0" (step S843).

Then, if the starting opening signal output number is not "0" (step S843; N), the starting opening signal output number is updated by -1 (step S844), and the starting opening signal output control timer in the starting opening signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The starting opening signal output control timer initial value is the ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) of the starting opening signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) for the OFF state (for example, low level) It is on time (for example, 128 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the starting opening signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the starting opening signal editing process is ended.
In addition, when the number of start opening signal outputs is "0" (step S843; Y), the off data for turning off the start opening signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S 848), the start opening signal editing process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0" (step S842; N), it is determined whether the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846). In addition, that a starting opening signal output control timer is in an output on area is that the value of a starting opening signal output control timer is not "0". When the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. If the start-up signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the start-up signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM ( Step S848), the starting opening signal editing process is ended.

  FIG. 94 shows the display modes to be displayed during the fluctuation time of the corresponding variable display game on the special view 1 display 51, the special view 2 display 52, and the general view display 53 respectively. In each of the drawings for explaining the display of the collective display device 50, the shaded light emitting portions indicate that the light emitting portions are lit, and the white light emitting portions indicate that the light emitting portions are extinguished.

  In the special figure 1 display 51, during the variation time of the first special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. The special view 1 during change display is composed of eight types of lighting patterns in which only one of the eight light emitting units included in the special view 1 display 51 is turned on.

  The display order of the lighting patterns is such that the light emitting units to be lit are displayed so as to transition in the order of D1, D2, D3, D4, D8, D7, D6, D5. The display time of each lighting pattern is 52 ms, and the time during which the special display 1 in-process display makes a round is 416 ms. In this first display during fluctuation, one light emitting unit is turned on in any lighting pattern, and the ratio of the number of light emitting units turned on to the number of light emitting units turned off is always constant, and a sense of unity in display I am trying to improve the decoration. During the fluctuation time of the first special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 during fluctuation display is repeatedly displayed.

  Then, when the fluctuation time of the first special view fluctuation display game is ended, the display of the special view 1 display 51 is in accordance with the result of the first special view fluctuation display game (any one of a plurality of hit results or an outlier result). The lighting pattern (result mode) is displayed and the result is displayed. Here, the lighting pattern used as a result mode to be displayed on the special view 1 display 51 can be easily identified as a lighting pattern other than the lighting pattern for the special view 1 being displayed. ing. Of course, as a result mode, the lighting pattern included in the special view 1 during display may be used. Alternatively, a plurality of lighting patterns may be assigned to one result, and one of the selected lighting patterns may be displayed by random numbers or the like.

  In the special figure 2 display 52, during the variation time of the second special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. The special pattern 2 display during fluctuation is a lighting pattern for lighting D17, D19, D21, D23, D25, and a lighting pattern for lighting D18, D20, D22, D24, D26 in which lighting and extinguishing are reversed from this lighting pattern. And consists of two lighting patterns. The display time of each lighting pattern is 104 ms, and the time during which the special display 2 is moving around is 208 ms. In this second display during fluctuation, four light emitting parts are turned on in any lighting pattern, and the ratio between the number of light emitting parts turned on and the number of light emitting parts turned off is always constant, and a sense of unity in display I am trying to improve the decoration. During the fluctuation time of the second special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 during fluctuation display is repeatedly displayed.

  Then, when the variation time of the second special view variation display game is over, the display of the special view 2 display 52 is in accordance with the result of the second special view variation display game (any one of a plurality of hit results or an outlier result). The lighting pattern (result mode) is displayed and the result is displayed. Here, the lighting pattern used as a result mode to be displayed on the special view 2 display 52 can be easily determined as a result pattern displayed as a lighting pattern other than the special view 2 fluctuating display lighting pattern. ing. Of course, as a result mode, the lighting pattern included in the special view 2 during display may be used. Alternatively, a plurality of lighting patterns may be assigned to one result, and one of the selected lighting patterns may be displayed by random numbers or the like.

  In the common drawing indicator 53, during the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, as shown in FIG. 94 (c), the common drawing fluctuation display in which the light emitting unit is lighted is performed. The display of the general drawing is made up of four types of lighting patterns in which only one of the four light emitting parts included in the common drawing display 53 is turned on.

  The display order of the lighting patterns is such that the light emitting units to be lit transition in the order of D27 → D28 → D30 → D29. The display time of each lighting pattern is 52 ms, and the time for which the display during circulation changes once is 208 ms. In this general display during fluctuating display, one light emitting unit is turned on in any lighting pattern, and the ratio of the number of light emitting units turned on to the number of light emitting units turned off is always constant, and a sense of unity in display I am trying to improve the decoration. During the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing fluctuation display is repeatedly performed.

  Then, when the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game is over, the display of the common drawing display 53 indicates the lighting pattern (result according to the result of any of the common drawing fluctuation display game (one or more of the hit results of plural types). And the result is displayed. Here, the lighting pattern used as a result mode to be displayed on the common view display 53 is made easy to distinguish that the result mode is displayed as a lighting pattern other than the lighting pattern for the normal view fluctuation display. . Of course, as a result mode, it is possible to use a lighting pattern included in the display during the general drawing fluctuation. Alternatively, a plurality of lighting patterns may be assigned to one result, and one of the selected lighting patterns may be displayed by random numbers or the like.

  That is, the game control means for executing the variable display game (general drawing fluctuation display game, first special drawing fluctuation display game, second special drawing fluctuation display game) in which the game control device 100 derives the result after a predetermined fluctuation time. I In addition, the common view variation display game executed based on the common view start memory generated by the game ball passing through the common view start gate 34, the first start memory generated based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 The first special view variation display game executed based on the second special view variation display game executed based on the second start memory generated based on the game ball winning to the normal variation winning device 37 meets the start condition A first variable display game executed based on the establishment of the first start condition or a second variable display game executed based on the establishment of the second start condition forming the start condition.

  In addition, the collective display device 50 is a display device for displaying a variable display game (a common view change display game, a first special view change display game, a second special view change display game). The two displays 52 and the common view display 53 constitute a first light emitting display unit for displaying a first variable display game or a second light emitting display unit for displaying a second variable display game. Also, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed on the first light emitting display unit during the first fluctuation display game fluctuation time display in the special drawing 1 fluctuation display, the special drawing 2 fluctuation display, and the common drawing fluctuation display. To display in a predetermined order the predetermined plurality of lighting patterns displayed on the second light emitting display unit in the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display game in which the second fluctuation display game is displayed in a predetermined order Make a display during the second change.

  In the above-mentioned display during common drawing, special display 1 during fluctuation, and special display 2 during fluctuation display, all the light emitting parts included in the display performing the display during fluctuation are turned on when the display makes one round. It has been This makes it possible to equalize the degree of exhaustion of the light emitting unit, and facilitates the detection of the light emitting unit that is not lit due to a failure. Also, in the above-mentioned display during ordinary drawing, special display 1 during fluctuation, and special image 2 during fluctuation display, the lighting pattern for lighting the same light emitting part is prevented from being continuous, and it is understood that the display during fluctuation is in progress. I am making it easy.

  Further, in the relationship between the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52, the number of light emitting units included in the special view 1 display 51 is smaller than the number of light emitting units included in the special view 2 display 52 There is. Further, the number of lighting patterns included in the first variation display is larger than the number of lighting patterns included in the second variation display, and the time for displaying one lighting pattern in the first variation display is during the second variation It is shorter than the time for displaying one lighting pattern in the display. Further, the time taken for the first display during the first change is longer than the time taken for the second display during the second change.

  By doing this, the appearance of the display on the special view 1 display 51 and the display on the special view 2 display 52 become different, and the decorativeness in the collective display device 50 is improved and the special view being executed is It becomes easy to determine the type of the variable display game.

  Also, the second special view variation display game is played with priority over the first special view variation display game, and in the specific gaming state (time saving state) that can be generated after the special gaming state, the winning of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 The second start memory is likely to occur, and the execution time of the special figure variation display game is also shortened. Therefore, during the specific gaming state, the execution frequency of the second special view variation display game is higher than that of the first special view variation display game.

  As described above, the special pattern 2 is displayed even during a short fluctuation time by reducing the lighting pattern included in the special figure 2 display during fluctuation, which is a display during fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game having a high execution frequency during the specific gaming state. It is easy for the user to make a round, so that there is no sense of incongruity in display during fluctuation display caused by the fact that the special display 2 is in progress during the display during fluctuation, and no bias in the exhaustion degree of the light emitting unit. In addition, the time when the special figure 2 fluctuation display makes a round is shorter than the shortest time among the fluctuation times that can be set for the second special figure fluctuation display game in the specific gaming state, and the second special figure fluctuation display game Then, at least the display during the special figure 2 change is made to go round.

  In addition, the time when the display during the general drawing fluctuation rounds and the time when the display during the special movement 2 rounds is the same time. Thereby, when both the common drawing fluctuation display game and the second special drawing fluctuation display game are in the fluctuation time, the display of the special drawing 2 display 52 and the display of the common drawing display 53 have a certain rhythm. As it changes, it looks as if it were related to the display of both displays, and the decorativeness of the batch display device 50 will be improved. Furthermore, the special view 2 display 52 for performing these displays and the common view display 53 being adjacent to each other also contributes to the improvement of the decorativeness of the collective display 50. In particular, it is effective in the specific gaming state in which the second special view variation display game is executed frequently.

  In addition, the time during which the display during normal map fluctuation makes a round is considered to be half the time during which the display during special graph 1 makes a round. That is, the time during which the display during normal map fluctuation makes a round is taken as a time that is a divisor of the time during which the display during special graph 1 makes a round. Thereby, when both the common drawing fluctuation display game and the first special drawing fluctuation display game are in the fluctuation time, the display of the special drawing 1 display 51 and the display of the common drawing display 53 have a certain rhythm. As it changes, it looks as if it were related to the display of both displays, and the decorativeness of the batch display device 50 will be improved.

  Furthermore, the number of light emitting portions of the special view 1 display 51 is twice the number of light emitting portions of the common view display 53, and the number of lighting patterns included in one cycle is also twice. That is, the number of light emitting portions of the special view 1 display 51 is a multiple of the number of light emitting portions of the common view display 53, and the number of lighting patterns included in one round is also the same multiple. In addition, the display during fluctuation is a display in which the light emitting unit which is lit turns in a clockwise direction, and the time for displaying one lighting pattern is also the same. These also give a sense of unity to both displays, and contribute to the improvement of the decorativeness of the collective display device 50. In particular, the first special view variation display game is effective when it is not in the specific gaming state where it is executed frequently.

  In this case, the time during which the display during normal map fluctuation makes a round is 208 ms, which is one of the divisors of 416 ms, which is the time during which the display during special graph 1 makes a round, It may be. In addition, although the number of light emitting portions of the special figure 1 display 51 is set to 8 which is one of multiples of 4 which is the number of light emitting portions of the common view display 53, it is a number other than this. Also good. In addition, the relationship between the special view 1 display 51 and the common view display 53 here is such that the ratio of the time during which the display during fluctuation goes around and the ratio of the number of light emitting sections become the inverse relationship. Although the decorativeness is further enhanced, it does not have to be in an inverse relationship.

  Further, at the start of the fluctuation time of the first special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 in-varying display is started from the lighting pattern in which only the light emitting part D1 is lit. In this case, if the lighting pattern corresponding to the result of the detachment that is most frequently derived in the game is the lighting pattern for lighting only the light emitting unit D1, the deviation result is displayed in the first special view fluctuation display game The display unit which lights up when starting the fluctuation display of the next first special view fluctuation display game from moving is not moved, and the discomfort of the display at the start of the fluctuation display can be eliminated.

  In addition, if the lighting pattern corresponding to the result of the detachment is a lighting pattern for lighting only the light emitting unit D5 which is least frequently used in the fluctuation time, the consumption degree of the light emitting unit can be made uniform. Further, the lighting pattern corresponding to the result of the off-set and the lighting pattern for starting the display during special figure 1 fluctuation (the lighting pattern for lighting only D1) are continuous lighting patterns in the special figure 1 variable display. Therefore, when the variable display of the next first special figure fluctuation display game is started from the state where the shift result is displayed in the first special drawing fluctuation display game, the change of the display mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display The same change is made, and the sense of incongruity at the start of the variable display can be eliminated.

  The degree of consumption of the light emitting unit can be equalized also by making the lighting pattern not using D1 to D4 which is used frequently in the lighting pattern in the first half of the special figure 1 display during one round correspond to the result of removal Effect is obtained. Further, the lighting pattern corresponding to the result of the disconnection may be a lighting pattern for lighting a plurality of light emitting parts, for example, a lighting pattern for lighting D1 and D2 or a lighting pattern for lighting D5 and D6. Alternatively, a plurality of lighting patterns may be assigned as lighting patterns corresponding to the result of the outliers, and one of the selected lighting patterns may be displayed by random numbers or the like.

  From the above, based on the establishment of the start condition, the variable display game (first special view fluctuation display game, second special view fluctuation display game, common drawing fluctuation display game) is executed to derive the result after a predetermined fluctuation time Game control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in an integrated manner and controls execution of the variable display game, and a display device (batch display controlled by the game control means to display the variable display game Device 50), and the game control means is a first variation display game (first special view variation display game, second The second variation display game (first special view variation display game, the first special view variation display game, the first variation figure display game, the first variation figure display game, which is executed based on the establishment of the second start condition which makes the figure variation display game 2 Special chart fluctuation chart The game is configured to execute a game, a common view variation display game, and the display device is a first light emitting display unit (special view 1 display 51, special view 2 display 52, common view 52 for displaying a first variation display game) Game control means, comprising a figure display 53) and a second light emitting display (special view 1 display 51, special view 2 display 52, general view display 53) for displaying a second variable display game, In the first variation display game, during the first variation display game, the first light emitting display unit is used to display a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order (during a first variation display (during special figure 1 variation) Control to repeat the display, the special figure 2 fluctuating display, the common drawing fluctuating display), and in the fluctuation time of the second variable display game, a plurality of lighting patterns previously determined using the second light emitting display unit Display during second change in a predetermined order (during special figure 1 change) Shows, special symbol 2 variation during the display, and that it is configured to perform control to repeat Hiroshizu variation Showing).

  Further, the number of light emitting units included in the second light emitting display unit (for example, the special view 2 display 52) is more than the number of light emitting units included in the first light emitting display unit (for example, the special view 1 display 51). The number of times the lighting pattern is updated in the case of one cycle of the second fluctuation display (for example, the special figure 2 fluctuation display) is one cycle of the first fluctuation display (for example, the special figure 1 fluctuation display). When controlling the lighting pattern to be less than the number of times the lighting pattern is updated, the interval of change of the lighting pattern in the second display during variation is longer than the interval of change of the lighting pattern in the display during first variation It will be controlled to become

  In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game that derives a result after a predetermined fluctuation time based on the establishment of a start condition, game control means that controls the game in an integrated manner and controls execution of the variable display game; And a display device controlled by the game control means to display the variable display game, the game control means (game control device 100) comprising a plurality of predetermined light emission time periods during the fluctuation time. A plurality of lighting patterns are configured to be repeatedly displayed on the display device (special figure 1 display 51, special figure 2 display 52, general drawing indicator 53) in a predetermined order, and displayed at fluctuation time The lighting pattern is such that the ratio between the number of lighted light emitting parts and the number of light emitting parts turned off is the same in any lighting pattern.

  Further, the plurality of lighting patterns displayed in the fluctuation time is a lighting pattern which is not displayed except in the fluctuation time, and the intervals at which the lighting patterns are updated in the fluctuation time are constant regardless of the lighting patterns.

  In addition, the special variation winning device 38 capable of converting the game ball into a closed state in which the game ball can not win and the open state in which the game ball can win, the closed state in which the game ball is hard to win or can not win, The game control means (the game control apparatus 100) is provided with a first variation display game and a second variation display game, and the normal variation prize device 37 capable of converting the state into the open state where the game ball can easily win or win. The special fluctuation winning device 38 is converted to the open state based on the result being a special result in one predetermined fluctuation display game (for example, the second special view fluctuation display game) of the fluctuation display games, The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is selected based on the result being a special result in the other predetermined fluctuation display game (for example, the common drawing fluctuation display game) of the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game. Into a state, the starting condition of ordinary fluctuation winning device predetermined one variable display game based on the winning to 37 is that it is possible satisfied.

  In addition, the state can be converted into the start winning opening 36 where the gaming ball can win, the closed state where the gaming ball is difficult to win or unable to win, and the open state where the gaming ball can win easily or can win more than the closed state. The game control means (game control device 100) is provided with a normal fluctuation winning device 37, a closed state where the gaming ball can not win a prize, and a special fluctuation winning device 38 capable of converting the state to an open state where the gaming ball can win a prize. Is a special game state occurrence that generates a special game state that converts the special variation winning device 38 to an open state based on the result being a special result in any of the first variation display game and the second variation display game Means (game control apparatus 100) and specific game state generation means (game control apparatus 100) capable of generating a specific game state for a predetermined predetermined period after the end of the special game state, and the specific game Condition occurrence The stage controls the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 so that winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier in the specific gaming state than in the case where it is not the specific gaming state, and from the case where it is not the specific gaming state Is also configured to reduce the fluctuation time, and the shortest time of the fluctuation time that can be set for the second fluctuation display game in the specific gaming state is longer than the time taken to cycle through the second fluctuation display Will be a long time too.

  In addition, the first starting memory which makes the 1st starting condition on the basis of winning of the game ball to starting winning a prize mouth 36 is remembered, 2nd starting condition is made on the basis of winning of the game ball to normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 (2) A start-up memory means (game control device 100) for storing start-up memory is provided, but the execution of the special view fluctuation display game is suspended with respect to either or both of the first start memory and the second start memory. The starting memory may not be generated. In addition, if there is a second start memory, a second change display game (for example, a second special view change display game) based on the second start memory, and a first change display game based on the first start memory It has priority control means (game control device 100) which is executed with priority over (for example, the first special view variation display game), but it is arranged to digest the first start memory and the second start memory in order of generation Also good.

  FIG. 95 shows a modified example of the special view 1 being displayed. The batch display device 50 according to the present embodiment includes corresponding portions that are symmetrical with respect to the arrangement of the light emitting units in the special view 1 display 51 and the arrangement of the light emitting units in the common view display 53. . The arrangement having this symmetry includes the same arrangement, the arrangement of point symmetry, the arrangement of line symmetry and the like. For example, the arrangement of the light emitting units of D1, D2, D5, and D6 in the special view 1 display 51 and the arrangement of the light emitting units in the common view display 53 are corresponding portions arranged identically and point-symmetrically arranged. And a line symmetrical arrangement. The relationship between the positions of D2, D3, D6, D7, D3, D4, D7, D8 in the special view 1 display 51 and the common view display 53 is the same.

  And, the decorativeness is enhanced by having the lighting mode in the corresponding part in the relation having symmetry in this way be related. With regard to the lighting mode in the light emitting portion (corresponding light emitting portion) located at a symmetrical position between the two display devices in the corresponding portion having the arrangement as symmetry, the lighting mode having the relation is before and after the change of the lighting pattern. There are lighting modes that result in identical changes that are all coincidental changes.

  Further, as the lighting mode having a relation, the lighting mode before the change of the lighting pattern is symmetrical (point symmetry or line symmetry), and the lighting mode after the change of the lighting pattern is also the same symmetry as before the change. Reverse order is the change in which the change in the corresponding part of one display and the change in the corresponding part of the other display are in reverse order in the process of lighting mode that becomes symmetrical change and the process of continuous predetermined number of changes The lighting mode which becomes change of is also included. Furthermore, the lighting mode which becomes a change corresponding to the above-mentioned same change, a change of symmetry, or a change of reverse order by reversing lighting and extinguishing is included.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (a), in the special figure 1 fluctuation display here, the seven light emission patterns of (1) to (7) to light two light emission parts and all the light emission parts are extinguished ((1) to (7)) The eight lighting patterns of the lighting pattern of 8) are sequentially performed.

  In this special figure 1 display during variation, the change of the lighting mode at portions D1, D2, D5 and D6 in the lighting patterns of (1) to (4) is the display during the generic drawing variation shown in FIG. 95 (b). It is a change of the same or point symmetry as the change of the lighting mode in the lighting patterns of (1) to (4). That is, the change of the lighting pattern is the same as the transition direction of the light emitting unit to be turned on. Moreover, the change of the lighting aspect in the part of D3, D4, D7, D8 in the lighting pattern of (1)-(4) is the display (1)-(4) of the common figure fluctuation shown in FIG. 95 (b) And a change in line symmetry with the change in the lighting mode in the lighting pattern.

  As described above, by associating the lighting modes in the corresponding parts having the symmetry relation, the display of both displays can be integrated and the decorativeness of the collective display device 50 can be enhanced. Here, the time to display one lighting pattern in the special figure 1 fluctuation display is set to 52 ms, and the time to display the one lighting pattern in the common pattern fluctuation display is set to 104 ms. Although the interval time for updating the pattern is a divisor of the time of the interval for updating the lighting pattern in the general drawing fluctuating display, it may be the same time, or may be another divisor. good. In addition, although the number of light emitting portions of the special figure 1 display 51 is set to 8 which is one of multiples of 4 which is the number of light emitting portions of the common view display 53, it is a number other than this. Also good. Further, the relationship between the special view 1 display 51 and the common view display 53 in this case is that the ratio of the time of the interval for updating the lighting pattern in the display during fluctuation and the ratio of the number of light emitting sections are inverses. In order to further enhance the decorativeness, it does not have to be in an inverse relationship.

  Even when the special figure 1 is being displayed, all the light emitting parts included in the special figure 1 display 51 are turned on by the display turning once. This makes it possible to equalize the degree of exhaustion of the light emitting unit, and facilitates the detection of the light emitting unit that is not lit due to a failure. Also, in the above-mentioned display during ordinary drawing, special display 1 during fluctuation, and special image 2 during fluctuation display, the lighting pattern for lighting the same light emitting part is prevented from being continuous, and it is understood that the display during fluctuation is in progress. I am making it easy. Furthermore, by including a lighting pattern for turning off all the light emitting parts as the lighting pattern, it is made easy to understand that the display in progress is progressing.

  FIG. 96 shows another example of the special view 1 being displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 96 (a), the change of the lighting mode at the portions D1, D2, D5, D6 in the special figure 1 during display is the lighting mode of the common view during the fluctuation shown in FIG. 95 (b). It is the change which becomes the same by reversing the change and turning on and off. Moreover, the change of the lighting mode in the part of D3, D4, D7, D8 in the special figure 1 change display shown in FIG. 96 (a) is the change of the lighting mode display in the common drawing change shown in FIG. 95 (b) It is the change which becomes reverse order by reversing lighting and extinguishing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 96 (b), the change in the lighting mode at portions D1, D2, D5, and D6 in the special figure 1 during display is the lighting mode of the common view during the fluctuation shown in FIG. 95 (b). Change and reverse order change. Moreover, the change of the lighting mode in the part of D3, D4, D7, D8 in the special figure 1 in-varying display shown in FIG. 96 (b) is the change in the lighting mode of the common view in FIG. 95 (b) Is the same change as

  FIG. 97 shows another example of a display including corresponding parts in a symmetrical relationship. In this example, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), the arrangement of the light emitting portions D1 to D8 in the special view 1 display 51 and the arrangement of the light emitting portions D17 to D24 in the special view 2 display 52 are symmetrical (here In the above, it is a corresponding portion which is a portion having line symmetry and point symmetry). It should be noted that the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 in FIG. 97 (a) show a state in which the result of the shift is displayed.

  FIG. 97 (b) shows the display of the special view 1 in the special view 1 display 51 during the change, and FIG. 97 (c) shows the display of the special view 2 in the special view 2 display 52. The change of the lighting mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display shown in FIG. 97 (b) is the change of the lighting mode and the line symmetry and the point symmetry in the special figure 2 fluctuation display shown in FIG. 97 (c) . In addition, the display time of each lighting pattern in the special figure 1 in-varying display and the special figure 2 in-varying display is 52 ms.

  In addition, the special figure 1 in-varying display and the special figure 2 in-varying display do not use a part of the light emitting parts among the light emitting parts included in the display even after one round. Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), the lighting pattern for lighting the display unit which is not used in the display during fluctuation is made to be the lighting pattern indicating the result of the disconnection. Thereby, the consumption degree of each light emitting unit can be made uniform.

  FIG. 98 shows another example of the special figure 1 in-varying display and the common figure in-varying display. In this example, the lighting pattern is changed so that the two adjacent light emitting units that are turned on circulate in the clockwise direction. As described above, in the process of the change of the lighting pattern, the change in which the movement modes of the light emitting part turned on or the light emitting part turned off in both displays are the same is one of the related changes.

  FIG. 99 shows another example of the special view 1 being displayed. In this example, the lighting pattern is changed so that the light emitting units adjacent in the clockwise direction sequentially turn on, and after all the light emitting units turn on, the light emitting units adjacent in the clockwise direction sequentially turn off It is supposed to change. As described above, the special light emitting element is displayed while changing so that the adjacent light emitting units sequentially turn on or off according to a certain order or direction, and the light emitting units adjacent according to the same order or direction as the other display It is also one of the related changes to make the change to turn on or off sequentially.

  From the above, the number of light emitting units included in the first light emitting display unit (for example, the special view 1 display 51) and the number of light emitting units included in the second light emitting display unit (for example, the common view display 53) Is a different number, and the same time is the time to make one cycle of the first display during fluctuation (for example, special figure 1 display during fluctuation) and the time to make the second display during fluctuation (for example The arrangement of two or more light emitting units that are a part or all of the first light emitting display unit and the arrangement of the two or more light emitting units that are a part or all of the second light emitting display unit A change in the lighting mode in the corresponding part of the first light emitting display part in an arbitrary period during the first display during fluctuation, and an arbitrary period in the display during the second display, which correspond to the same or symmetrical arrangement. And the change of the lighting mode in the corresponding part of the second light emitting display part It can be assumed to be so controlled to be at least one change of the changes made identical, symmetrical or reverse order to reverse the off and reverse change or lighting.

  In addition, the number of light emitting units included in the first light emitting display unit (for example, the special view 1 display 51) and the number of light emitting units included in the second light emitting display unit (for example, the common view display 53) are different. It is assumed that the time to make one cycle of the first display during fluctuation (for example, special figure 1 display during fluctuation) and the time to make the second display during fluctuation (for example Will be in control.

  In addition, the number of light emitting units included in the first light emitting display unit (for example, the special view 1 display 51) is a multiple of the number of light emitting units included in the second light emitting display (for example, the common view display 53). The game control means (the game control apparatus 100) displays the second variation display (for example, the second variation display) in the first variation display (for example, the special figure 1 variation display) to update the lighting pattern. Control is made to be a divisor of the time of the interval for updating the lighting pattern in the normal fluctuation display), and all the light emission units included in the first light emission display unit are controlled when the first fluctuation display is cycled Control is performed so as to light at least once, and control is made so that all the light emitting units included in the second light emitting display unit are lighted at least once when the second variation display is cycled There is.

  In addition, the game control means (game control device 100), during the first fluctuation indication (for example, special figure 1 fluctuation indication), the interval of renewal of lighting pattern and the 2nd fluctuation indication (for example, special figure 2 fluctuation) Control is performed so that the lighting pattern update interval in the display) becomes the same time, and at least one of the first variation display and the second variation display is one of the light emitting units included in the light emitting display unit performing the display Thus, the display can be made without using a part of the light emitting parts.

  In addition, the game control means (game control device 100), during the first fluctuation indication (for example, special figure 1 fluctuation indication), the interval of renewal of lighting pattern and the 2nd fluctuation indication (for example, special figure 2 fluctuation) Control is performed so that the time between the lighting pattern update intervals in (display) becomes the same time.

  FIG. 100 shows a modification of the collective display device 50. In this batch display device 50, the special view 2 display 51 for displaying the second special view variation display game is D17 to D20 and D22 to D25, and the second start memory which is the right to execute the second special view variation display game The special figure 2 reservation indicator 55 which shows the number of is D21 and D26.

  In addition, a first gaming state display unit (a first gaming state indicator, a right strike notification unit) 57 that informs the collective display device 50 that the game state in which the right strike is more advantageous than the left strike is available. The second game state display unit (second game state indicator, time reduction state notification unit) 58 that lights up when a state occurs and notifies the occurrence of a time reduction state is D11, D12, and D14. Furthermore, the round display unit 60 that displays the number of rounds when the big hit (the number of opening and closing of the special fluctuation winning device 38) is D13, D15, D16.

  As described above, the player can easily understand by providing the display for displaying each variable display game and the hold display for displaying the start memory number of the variable display game adjacent to each other. In addition, in the case of diverting the same collective display device 50 to gaming machines having different specifications, when there is a variable display game that does not generate a start memory for holding the execution of the game, the adjacent hold display is displayed as the variable display If used as part of the display of the game, it is easy because the arrangement of the other display does not have to be changed.

  In the above description, the variable display game is executed based on the establishment of the start condition and the result is derived after a predetermined change time, and a special result is obtained based on the result of the variable display game. Although the so-called type 1 variable display game that generates the gaming state has been mentioned, other variable display games may be used. For example, the game ball that has flowed into a winning device that executes a variable display game that derives the result after a predetermined fluctuation time based on the establishment of the start condition and that the result of the variable display game becomes a specific result is It may be a so-called two types of variable display game that generates a special gaming state based on winning in a specific area in the winning device.

  Further, as in the above-described gaming machine, two independent type 1 variable type display games may be performed as a special figure variable type display game, or one type may be used as one type, and the other may be used as two types. , Both may be of two types. In addition, one type or two types of variable display game may be played as the special figure variable display game. In addition, normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is designated as the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth which can always be prized, 2nd starting memory is generated on the basis of the prize in the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth, it does not do concerning the common drawing fluctuation indicatory game You may do so.

  Further, although the lighting patterns in which the same light emitting unit is turned on are not continuous in the above-described display during variation, the lighting patterns in which the same light emitting unit is turned on may be continuous. Also, the same lighting pattern may be continuous, and in this case, the display time of the lighting pattern can be extended.

  Further, the number of light emitting units included in the special view 1 display 51, the special view 2 display 52, and the common view display 53 can be arbitrarily set. Of course, only one light emitting unit may be used. In addition, the special view 1 during display, the special view 2 during change display, and the general view during change display have different display contents, but may have the same display contents. Moreover, although lighting and extinguishing were mentioned as a lighting aspect of a light emission part, you may include blink, a change of luminescent color, etc. besides this. In the case of blinking, a blinking pattern is also included in the lighting mode.

  Also, in place of the blinking control timer for controlling the display on the special view 1 display 51, the special view 2 display 52, and the common view display 53 in the collective display device 50, the special view 1 reserve display 54, The display may be controlled using a blink display timer for controlling the blinking state of the special view 2 reserve display 55 and the common view reserve display 56. In this case, a bit to be referred to in the blinking display timer area is selected in accordance with the display update timing required for the display on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the common view display 53 The display is sequentially updated depending on whether the bit is 0 or 1. By doing this, the switching timing of the display on the special view 1 display 51, the special view 2 display 52, and the general view display 53 and the special view 1 reserve display 54, the special view 2 reserve display 55, It is also possible to synchronize with the switching timing of the light emission state in the blinking state in the figure suspension display 56, and the decorativeness can be improved.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 101 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 101, in the main processing, first, processing at the start of the program is performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is inhibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, a power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

  After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) is performed to create input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. Reading of the input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, a process of changing the contents of the effect is performed.

  Then, a hall / player setting mode process is performed to receive operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as brightness of LED and liquid crystal and volume, and change of brightness and volume of LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a random number updating process (step C11) is performed to update the random number for determining the details of the variation mode of the decorative special view variation display game.

  Then, the command from the game control apparatus 100 is analyzed and a reception command check process (step C12) for handling is performed, and effect display editing process (step C13) for editing the setting for controlling the progression of the effect and the drawing command ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (one frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated in a timing later than 1/60 seconds (frame Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that the frame switching timing is not reached (step C15; N), the processing in step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

  Thereafter, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b), and control of LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the sub information display device 90 A decoration control process (step C18) to be performed and a movable body control process (step C19) to control the motor and the solenoid of the panel effect device 44 are performed. Then, an initial operation process of setting an initial operation of the movable effect apparatus is performed (step C20), and the process returns to the process of clearing WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 102 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this reception command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter which counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the number of command reception (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). When it is determined that the command reception number is 0 (step C202; N), the reception command check process is ended. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

  Next, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), and the command reading index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205). It is determined (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, without analyzing the command directly in the reception command buffer, the content of the reception command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. In this way, it is possible to move a command (data) to make a vacancy in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during analysis of the command. In addition, analysis of commands can be performed collectively in one round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the processing returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and a received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). When it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. If it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is ended. As described above, in the reception command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis process]
FIG. 103 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  If it is determined in step C232 or C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If ACT is determined to be the correct combination in step C234 in step C234 (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the special figure. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235; Y), variation system command processing (step C236) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variation system command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or a round screen) relating to a big hit medium effect, or a command instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or an end screen) related to small hit medium effects. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the big hit system command (step C237; Y), the big hit system command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit system command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol system command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special drawing (for example, what to make the stop symbol of the special drawing, etc.). When it is determined that MODE is in the range of the symbol system command (step C239; Y), symbol system command processing (step C240) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol system commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of one-shot commands such as pending number command or error command. (Step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The one-shot commands include a wait for customer demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch symbol system commands (step C243). Then, if it is determined that MODE is the range of the pre-reading symbol system command (step C243; Y), the pre-reading symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch change command (step C245; Y), the read change command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch change command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is ended.

  The preread variation system command and the preread symbol system command are commands including information necessary to execute the preread effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponding to the start memory (pending) not executed is a big hit when it is subsequently executed In order to notify the player in advance (with what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) to the player with a predetermined reliability, performing the decoration special view start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a mode different from normal Effects such as effect display. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading fluctuation system command and pre-reading symbol system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which corresponds to the starting memory which becomes the object of pre-reading effect, from starting game winning a prize 100 It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal variation system command and symbol system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the variation display start.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 104 shows one-shot command processing in the above-mentioned reception command analysis processing. In this one-shot system command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information on a model set in the game control device 100 (step C261). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to a model designation command (step C261; Y), model setting processing is performed to rewrite internal information into model information corresponding to the command (step C262), and single-shot system command processing Finish.

  If it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model specification command (step C261; N), whether it corresponds to the RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. It determines (step C263). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263; Y), the RAM initialization processing is performed (step C264), and the one-shot system command processing is ended. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), an area requiring initialization is initialized, and RAM initialization screen information is set. Further, scenario data for initializing the RAM is set in order to perform an effect when the initialization of the RAM is performed.

  If it is determined in step C263 that MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), the MODE is a power failure recovery command indicating recovery from a power failure without initializing the RAM 111C. It is determined whether it is a corresponding one (step C265). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to a power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), power failure recovery processing is performed (step C266), and the one-shot system command processing is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), an area requiring initialization is initialized, and recovery screen information for displaying a power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to provide an effect upon power failure recovery.

  If it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to a power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a customer waiting demo command indicating the start of a customer waiting demo Step C267). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C 267; Y), the customer waiting demonstration process is performed (step C 268), and the one-shot system command processing is ended. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set during the customer waiting demonstration, and customer waiting scenario data is set in order to perform customer waiting effects.

  If it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the special view 1 suspension (step C269). And, when MODE is special figure 1 retention (step C269; Y), the decoration special feature which corresponds to the processing which displays the decoration special figure starting memory indication which corresponds to the retention which it occurs on display unit 41 and which is digested The special figure 1 hold information setting process is carried out (step C270), and the one-shot system command process is ended. When it is determined in step C269 that MODE does not correspond to the special figure 1 suspension (step C269; N), it is determined whether the MODE is special figure 2 suspension (step C271). And, when MODE is the special figure 2 reserve (step C271; Y), the decoration special feature corresponding to the processing which displays the decoration special figure starting memory indication which corresponds to the retention which it occurs on display unit 41 and the reserve which is digested A special figure 2 hold information setting process is carried out (step C272), and the one-shot system command process is terminated. That is, the effect control device 300 is a start storage display means for performing start storage notification display for displaying information related to the start storage by the start storage display (the decoration special view start storage display) corresponding to each start storage.

  In addition, if MODE is not the special view 2 hold at step C271 (step C271; N), it is determined whether MODE is probability information (step C273). Then, when MODE is probability information (step C273; Y), probability information setting processing for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the one-shot system command processing ends.

  If MODE is not probability information in step C273 (step C273; N), it is determined whether MODE is error / illegal (step C275). Then, if MODE is error / illegal (step C 275; Y), error / illegal setting processing is performed to perform corresponding processing such as error notification (step C 276), and the one-shot command processing ends.

  If MODE is not error / illegal in step C275 (step C275; N), it is determined whether MODE is effect mode switching (step C277). Then, when MODE is effect mode switching (step C277; Y), effect mode switching processing for performing processing of switching the effect mode is performed (step C278), and the one-shot command processing ends.

  If MODE is not effect mode switching in step C277 (step C277; N), it is determined whether MODE is symbol stop (step C279). Then, when MODE is not symbol stop (step C279; N), the one-shot system command processing ends. If MODE is symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is normal (step C280). In the determination of whether the command is a normal command, for example, it is determined whether the target of the decoration special figure stop command is a target for the special figure currently changing.

  Then, if the command is not normal (step C280; N), the one-shot system command processing ends. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), stop setting of the corresponding special view is made (step C281), and if all symbols have stopped, the gaming state flag is set to the normal state (step C282) End one-shot command processing. As a result, the variable display of the corresponding decorative special game variable display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state, and in addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as during fluctuation, during a big hit, during a small hit, etc., and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

[Ahead reading symbol system command processing]
FIG. 105 shows prefetch symbol system command processing (step C244) in the reception command analysis processing described above. In this pre-reading symbol system command processing, first, it decides whether or not the latest reservation information is special figure 1 reservation (step C301). If the latest hold information is the special view 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, if the received prefetch symbol system command relates to the special view 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special view 1 hold number 1 Save in the prefetch symbol command area (step C302), set the prefetch change command reception waiting flag (step C304), and end the prefetch symbol system command processing.

  In addition, when the latest hold information is not special view 1 hold (step C301; N), that is, when the received prefetch symbol system command relates to special view 2 hold, the command corresponds to the special view 2 hold number The special view 2 symbol symbol pattern area is saved (step C303), the prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set (step C304), and the symbol pattern symbol command processing ends. The reason for which the prefetch change command reception waiting flag is set in step C304 is that the prefetch pattern command and the prefetch change command (prefetch change pattern command) are set (paired).

[Read-ahead change system command processing]
FIG. 106 shows prefetch change system command processing (step C246) in the above-mentioned reception command analysis processing. In this pre-reading variation system command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading variation command is waiting to be received (step C311). Here, when there is a prefetch variation command reception waiting flag set in the above-described prefetch symbol system command processing, it is determined that the reception is waiting. If it is not waiting to receive the prefetch change command (step C311; N), the prefetch change system command processing ends. On the other hand, when waiting for reception of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C311; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command reception waiting flag is cleared (step C312).

  Thereafter, in the process of steps C313 to C316, a process of converting the prefetch change command (preread change pattern command) received from the game control device 100 so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control device 300 is performed. First, a process (step C313) is performed to set the look-ahead fluctuation mode conversion table corresponding to the number of pending symbols in the latest hold information (step C313), and the information of the special view type of starting storage corresponding to the previously received fluctuation command A MODE conversion table for converting MODE is set according to the current number of reservations of the special drawing type.

  Next, with reference to the set MODE conversion table, the in-sub pre-reading fluctuation command MODE corresponding to the pre-reading fluctuation command MODE is acquired (step C314). Further, the pre-reading fluctuation ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and the in-sub pre-reading conversion command ACT corresponding to the pre-reading fluctuation command ACT is acquired (step C316).

  Although the information on the first half fluctuation is included in the MODE, the contents and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE change according to the number of reservations at the time of judgment. The judgment result may differ depending on the judgment at the time. Therefore, MODE is converted in the conversion mode according to the current number of reservations, in order to be able to perform processing of preview advance notice effect easily and reliably without being influenced by the number of reservations at the time of determination It can be handled in common regardless of the number of reservations. For example, there may be no reach loss fluctuation, which may result in a short first half fluctuation time depending on the holding status, or no reach out fluctuation fluctuation, such as a long first half fluctuation time regardless of the holding status. It converts into MODE classified into the item considered in the setting of pre-reading advance notice production so that processing of pre-reading advance notice production can be performed easily and certainly.

  In addition, ACT contains information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence or absence of reach and the type of reach. The contents of the latter half fluctuation set based on this ACT do not change depending on the number of reservations at the time of determination. However, for example, even in the case of normal reach, there are various aspects even in the same kind of reach such that the final stop symbol stops at one frame before the reach symbol and the one at the end of the first symbol stops and the hit case is set. Because the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide. For this reason, the number of the ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system is reduced by converting the ACTs to the same ACT, and the processing load such as the check in the processing of the pre-reading advance notice effect is reduced.

  Next, it is determined whether both of MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C317). If MODE and ACT after conversion are both other than 0 (step C317; N), since they are abnormal command values, the prefetch change system command processing ends. On the other hand, if MODE and ACT after conversion are both not 0 (step C317; Y), save the converted command in the latest hold information and the prefetch change command area corresponding to the number of holds (step C318), MODE The read command consistency check process (step C319) is performed to determine whether the combination of R and ACT (command combination) is normal.

  If the command combination is not normal (step C320; N) as a result of the prefetch command consistency check process (step C319), the prefetch variation system command process is ended. On the other hand, if the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), a prefetch lottery process (step C321) for lottery execution of the prefetch advance notice effect is performed to determine whether the prefetch advance notice effect is to be generated (step C322).

  Then, if the prefetch advance notice effect is not generated (step C322; N), the prefetch variation system command processing is ended. On the other hand, when generating a preview advance notice effect (step C322; Y), it is specified that the effect to be executed in the special figure fluctuation display game which has not been executed yet is the effect previously determined before the special figure fluctuation display game is started. It is determined whether it is an effect (step C323).

  If it is not the specific effect (step C323; N), the display corresponding to the selected prefetch advance notice effect is set (step C324), and the prefetch change system command processing is ended. The pre-reading advance notice effect in this case is a pending change notice or the like in which the display mode of the decoration special view start memory display displayed on the display device 41 is changed from the current time.

  If the effect is a specific effect (step C323; Y), the advance notice effects of all the target games are set (step C325), and the specific effect flag is saved (step C326). Furthermore, the final flag is saved in the area of the specific effect information storage area corresponding to the start storage (step C327), and the prefetch change system command processing is ended.

  For example, a pre-read advance notice effect that is generated (that is, a pre-read advance notice effect selected in the pre-selection lottery process (step C321)) produces a specific effect or reach condition continuously over a plurality of special view variable display games, In the case of a specific effect such as the effect of giving a notice by the character appearing in the variable display, in step C325, the effect of the advance notice effect is decided on the contents of the effect to be executed in each special view change display game targeted for the advance notice effect. It is set in advance when you

  In addition, about the pending change notice which changes the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on display 41 from the present, when the change of the further display mode is performed in the special figure change display game until the digestion of the starting memory concerned. It may be set in advance at which timing the change is to be made. In the case of a hold change notice in which the display mode of the decorative special figure start storage display is changed at a timing later than the current time, the timing of the change may be set in advance.

  In FIG. 107, the execution of the specific effect is determined for the specific effect that is to be executed in the special image change display game that has not been executed yet before the start of the special image change display game. The specific effect information storage area set in the RAM 322 is shown for storing information to be set in advance.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (a), in the specific effect information storage area, areas 1a to 1d associated with the digest order for each start storage of the first start storage (special figure 1), and the second start storage ( There are eight areas 2a to 2d associated with the digest order for each starting memory of Special Figure 2). In addition, an executing area is provided for storing information of the specific effect currently being executed. Then, when the execution of the specific effect is determined, the content of the specific effect in the special view variable display game based on each start storage is determined in step C325, and the information is stored in the corresponding area.

  FIG. 107 (b) shows the case where the countdown notice is set as the advance notice notice effect that makes the specific effect for the first start memory. In this case, when the first start-up memory having the fourth digestion order is generated, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect for the start-up memory is determined. Then, based on the determination of the execution of the specific effect, the contents of the effects in the special view variation display game are determined for the start-up memories having the first to fourth digesting orders to be targeted for preview advance notice effects. Information is stored in the corresponding area.

  A countdown notice "no display" is set for the first and second first starting memories whose digestion order is first and second. Thus, the countdown notice is not displayed in the special view variable display game based on these start memories. However, by setting information in the specific effect information storage area, it is possible to grasp that it is the execution period of the specific effect. As described above, it is possible to set in advance that the effect is not to be performed, and thereby it is possible to prevent the effect that is inconsistent with the countdown notice to be performed later.

  In addition, a countdown notice "count 1" is set for the first starting memory whose digestion order is the third. Thus, in the special view variation display game based on the start memory, an effect of displaying “1” indicating that it is one before the special view variation display game to be notified is performed. The countdown notice "count 0" is set for the first start-up memory whose digestion order is the fourth. Thus, in the special view change display game based on the start memory, an effect of displaying “0” indicating that the special view change display game to be notified is performed.

  In addition, no information is stored in the area under execution when the specific effect is not started. Each time the special view variation display game to be subjected to the specific effect is started, the information on the first area of the first start-up memory and the information on the first start area of the second start-up memory The information of the area corresponding to the start storage is copied to the active area. Further, along with this, the information of the copy source area is erased, and the information of the digestion orders 2 to 4 is carried up one by one.

  FIG. 107 (c) shows the case where the continuous advance notice is set as the advance notice effect to make the specific effect for the second start memory. In this case, when the second start-up memory having the fourth digestion order is generated, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect for the start-up memory is determined. Then, with regard to start-up memories whose digesting orders are the first to fourth digestion orders to be subjected to prefetch advance notice effects, the contents of the effects in each special image variation display game are determined, and information is stored in the corresponding area of the specific effect information storage area. Ru. In this example, the first to fourth effects are sequentially performed according to the order of digestion.

  In addition, although execution of a specific effect was decided based on reception of a look-ahead system command, execution of a specific effect is decided at arbitrary timing, and the content of the specific effect in the special figure fluctuation display game based on each starting memory is determined Then, the information may be stored in the specific effect information storage area. Moreover, it is also possible to set an effect that is not a preview advance notice effect as a specific effect without being based on information of a pre-reading system command, for example, a special figure change based on a first start memory whose digestion order is the fourth at the present time It is also possible to set the effect in the display game. In this case, the execution of the effect can be set even if the start memory to be the effect is not generated yet, and the information may be stored in the corresponding area of the specific effect information storage area.

[Design system command processing]
FIG. 108 shows symbol system command processing (step C240) in the above-mentioned reception command analysis processing. In this symbol system command processing, first, the special figure type (either special figure 1 or special figure 2) corresponding to MODE is set (step C351), and the symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set. Save (step C352), and complete the symbol system command processing.

  The symbol types are categories of symbols such as off symbol, 16R positive variation A big hit symbol, 16R positive variation B big hit symbol, 16R normal A big hit symbol, 16R normal B big hit symbol, 4R positive variation big hit symbol, small hit symbol etc. It is associated with data. Since the symbol ratio changes in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (the probability change ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and it corresponds to the data of MODE from plural symbol type setting tables Is selected and the symbol type corresponding to ACT is set with reference to the table.

[Variable system command processing]
FIG. 109 shows variable system command processing (step C236) in the reception command analysis processing described above. In this variation system command processing, first, it is determined whether the special view type is undetermined (step C361). The special drawing type is information indicating whether the special drawing type is special drawing 1 or special drawing 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-described symbol system command processing.

  If the special view type is undetermined (step C361; Y), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not yet determined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variation command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variation command and the symbol type It is determined whether there is a mismatch (step C363).

  If the variation command and the symbol type do not match (step C363; Y), the variation system command processing ends. If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). A symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, off symbol, 16R positive variation A big hit symbol, 16R positive variation B big hit symbol, 16R normal A big hit symbol, 16R normal B big hit symbol, 4R positive variation big hit symbol, small There is a hit pattern etc. If the variation command and the symbol type do not match, perform the rendering as if you received the symbol command of the 16R definite variation A big hit symbol even though the variation command (variation pattern command) of loss was received It means that it is the combination (combination of the change command and the symbol type) which contradicts above.

  In the process of determining the change pattern type from the change command (step C364), the change pattern type which is a rough classification of the change display effect of the special view is determined according to the received command. And the fluctuation production setting processing which sets up the information in order to do the production which responds to the fluctuation command is done (step C365).

  Next, the special figure variation is set as the P machine state (the state of the pachinko machine) (step C366). Here, “during special figure fluctuation” indicates that the special figure is fluctuating (during a customer demonstration or during a big hit, or not being a fanfare medium grade). Further, if the pre-reading effect frequency (pre-reading execution frequency) is not zero, the pre-reading effect frequency is updated by 1 (processing to reduce the pre-reading effect frequency by 1) (step C367), and the variation system command processing is ended. In addition, since it is possible to manage the number of times of execution and the end of the advance notice notice effect by the information of the specific effect information storage area, it is possible to manage the specific effect even without setting the number of times of the advance effect.

[Change production setting process]
FIG. 110 shows the fluctuation effect setting process (step C365) in the above-mentioned fluctuation system command process. In this variation production setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern type is a no reach variation (step C381). If the change pattern type is no reach change (step C381; Y), the model code, the special figure type, and the first-half advance notice group address table corresponding to the effect mode at that time are set (step C382). In addition, since it is a reach no change, symbol classification is always a lost pattern, and it is not necessary to refer to symbol classification here especially. The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and naturally varies depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a probability change mode, a time saving mode, a latency mode and the like. Furthermore, in each mode, a plurality of modes are provided in which the distribution rate of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decoration special view variable display game on the display device 41 are made different.

  Next, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of holdings of MODE, special view type is acquired with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table (step C383). Thus, in the case of no reach fluctuation, it is possible to change the lottery contents of the notice effect (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) appearing during each change according to the number of reservations. Thereafter, a first half notice setting process is performed to set a notice appearing during the first half fluctuation (step C386).

  On the other hand, if the change pattern type is not reach-less change (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special view type, the effect mode and the symbol type is set (step C384). Then, the address of the first half advance distribution group table corresponding to the MODE, fluctuation pattern type is acquired with reference to the first half advance distribution group address table (step C 385), and the notice to appear during the first half change is set. The first half notice setting process is performed (step C386).

  Next, a lottery is made for the second half of the change. In addition, with the second half change of the special figure fluctuation indicatory game fluctuation indication with the so-called reach action (for example, the special result feature (combination of the special design) where the display territory excluding the specific territory becomes large hitting among the display territory of the special figure) Is stopped, and it is a variable display of the state which is fluctuating display only in a specific field. On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

  First, the second half of the previous day distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special drawing type, the effect mode and the symbol type is set (step C387). The second half prior distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half previous distribution group table. Then, the address of the second half of the previous day sorting group table corresponding to the ACT is acquired by referring to the second half of day prior sorting distribution group address table (step C 388), and the second half is fluctuating (reaching) using the second half day of sorting distribution group table A lottery for appearing notices is made (step C389).

  Thereafter, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to MODE and ACT are determined (step C390), and the contents of the effect corresponding to the preliminary lottery result are determined (step C391). As a result, the presentation and notice such as the fluctuation time and main reach contents of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game are determined. Further, stop symbol setting processing is performed to determine a stop symbol with reference to the determined change pattern (such as reach effect) of the special view change display game and the advance notice content (step C392).

  Next, display setting of the fluctuation effect is performed (step C393), and display setting of the notice effect is performed (step C394). By these processes, it is possible to execute an effect or a notice in the decoration special figure variation display game set as described above. Then, a sound number which is a BGM number, a decoration number which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp, etc. are set (step C395), and the decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special drawing type (variation display of identification information) Display setting is performed (step C396). Furthermore, in the information display device 630, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol that displays the decorative special view variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special view type (Step C397), and the variation effect setting process ends.

[First half notice setting process]
FIG. 111 shows the former half advance notice setting process (step C386) in the above-mentioned fluctuation effect setting process. In this first half notice setting process, there is a specific effect flag that is set when the execution of the specific effect is determined, and is cleared at the start of the special view variation display game based on the last start memory to be the target of the specific effect It is determined (step C551). If the specific effect flag is not present (step C551; N), the lottery for the notice appearing during the first half fluctuation is performed (step C558), and the first half notice setting process is ended. In this process, a lottery for notices appearing during the first half fluctuation is made using the first half notice distribution group table. In this case, no specific effect is selected.

  In addition, when there is a specific effect flag (step C551; Y), the digestion order in the special figure type (the special figure type for which the special figure variation display game is executed this time) targeted by the specific effect information storage area as the first half notice effect. Sets the effect stored in the first area (step C552). Thereby, the first half advance notice effect is set based on the information set in advance when it is determined to execute the specific effect. Next, the information of the first region of the digestion order is copied to the region under execution (step C553), and it is determined whether there is a final flag set in the start storage of the advance notice target (step C554).

  If there is no final flag (step C554; N), that is, the last special-figure variation display game in which the special-figure variation display game of this time executes a specific effect If not, the process moves to step C556. In addition, when there is a final flag (step C554; Y), that is, the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the special figure fluctuation display game this time executes the specific effect If it is a game), the specific effect flag is cleared (step C555), and the process proceeds to step C556. Then, the information of the target special image type area is shifted to an area earlier in the digest order (step C556), the free area after the shift is cleared (step C557), and the first half advance notice setting process is ended.

  In the state where the specific effect flag is cleared, the setting of the specific effect referring to the specific effect information storage area is not performed. As a result, even if the information remains in the specific effect information storage area for some reason, the setting of the effect based on this information is not performed, and the execution of the unintended specific effect can be prevented.

  By the above process, the specific effect is set based on the information preset in the specific effect information storage area. Although the specific effect is performed during the first half fluctuation, the specific effect may be performed during the second half fluctuation, or the specific effect may be performed during the first half and the second half. However, in order to perform a specific effect during the second half fluctuation, it is necessary for the special figure fluctuation display game to be a reach, so only the starting memory that has been found to be a reach based on the preread information The setting is made to store the information in the specific effect information storage area.

[Special figure 1 reservation information setting process]
FIG. 112 shows the special view 1 suspension information setting process (step C270) in the above-described one-shot system command process. In this special view 1 pending information setting process, first, the currently stored special view 1 pending count is loaded and set as the previous pending count (step C501), and the value of the command is set in the special view 1 pending count as the new pending count. Then (step C502), it is determined whether the number of new holdings and the number of previous holdings are the same (step C503).

  If the new holding number and the previous holding number are the same (step C 503; Y), the special view 1 holding information setting process is ended. If the new holding number and the previous holding number are not the same (step C503; N), the index of the holding motion control table corresponding to the new holding number is calculated and saved (step C504). Prepare (step C505). Further, the address of the special view 1 suspension scenario data table (X pending) is prepared (step C506), and scenario data setting processing is performed (step C507). By this process, display or deletion of the decoration special drawing start memory display accompanying increase or decrease of the number of reservations and decoration display (animation) accompanying this are set. In addition, when a new start memory occurs during execution of the decoration display, the display of the decoration special view start memory display and the decoration display corresponding to the new start memory is executed after the end of the decoration display in progress. Set

  Then, it is determined whether the number of reservations has increased (step C508). If the number has increased (step C508; Y), the display pattern of the suspension normal lighting is set in the color information area corresponding to the new number of reservations (step C509) . Thereby, the display in the normal display mode in which the pre-reading advance notice effect or the like is not performed is set for the decorative special drawing start memory display corresponding to the start memory generated this time. The pre-reading notice effect in the special drawing start memory display is set by the pre-reading variation system command processing.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the state of machine P is a big hit (step C510), and if it is a big hit (step C510; Y), the special view 1 hold information setting process is ended. If the jackpot is not in progress (step C510; N), the output request of the starting opening winning sound is requested (step C511), and the special view 1 suspension information setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the number of reservations is not increased (step C508; N), that is, when it is decreased, the special figure 1 prefetch information area is shifted (step C512) and the color information area is shifted (step C513). FIG. 1 The hold information setting process ends.

  In addition, it was made to output the starting opening winning a prize sound when not being a big hit, but it outputs the starting opening winning a prize sound only when the blinking state is started or ended as the display state of the special view 1 suspension display 54 You may do it. When the blinking state starts or ends, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the light emitting state is the same before and after the transition, but it is difficult to recognize whether or not the transition has occurred, but such a problem is caused by outputting the starting opening prize sound. It can be eliminated. In addition, the starting opening winning sound may be output only when the blinking state is started and the light emitting state is the same before and after the transition.

[Special figure 2 reservation information setting processing]
FIG. 113 shows the special view 2 pending information setting process (step C272) in the above-described one-shot system command process. In the special figure 2 reserve information setting process, the same process as the special figure 1 reserve information setting process described above is performed for the second start storage, and the process of steps C521 to C531, C535, and C536 is the special figure 1 described above. This process is similar to the hold information setting process.

  In addition, when the number of reservations increases (step C528; Y), it determines whether there is a specific effect flag (step C532), and when there is no specific effect flag (step C532; N), the special figure 2 reservation information End the setting process. In addition, when there is a specific effect flag (step C532; Y), whether the object is the special view 1 (first start memory), that is, the last special map fluctuation display game to execute the specific effect If there is, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation display game to be notified is the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory (step C533).

  If the target is not the special view 1 (step C533; N), the special view 2 hold information setting process is ended. If the target is the special figure 1 (step C533; Y), the information of the executing area of the specific effect information storage area is copied to the corresponding area (step C534), and the special figure 2 hold information setting process is performed. finish. As a result, in the special figure 2 variable display game executed by interrupting, the specific effect being executed is repeatedly performed.

  By copying the information in this manner, it is possible to perform an effect that is easy to be recognized by the player without contradiction by simple control. In addition, when starting a special view variation display game based on a new second start memory generated during execution of the specific effect for the first start memory, the progress degree of the specific effect (how many times is it now, etc. It is not necessary to refer to), and the burden of control can be reduced.

  FIG. 114 shows an example of the decoration display (animation) when the starting memory is digested and reduced. As shown in FIG. 114 (a), at the center of the display area of the display device 41, an ornament special game variation display game display unit 85 for displaying an ornament special game variation display game is provided. Here, the decorative feature variation display game is displayed by variably displaying identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then displaying the identification information in a stopped state.

  Further, at the lower center of the display area, there is provided a storage display unit 83 for displaying a decoration special view start storage display corresponding to the start storage. The storage display unit 83 is provided with a first storage display unit 83a for displaying the first start storage and a second storage display unit 83b for displaying the second start storage. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the first memory display unit 83a corresponds to the first start memory in a one-to-one correspondence and is displayed side by side in the order of the memory, and here there are four first start memories It is shown that. The decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end is the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory stored first, and is shifted to the left each time it is digested. Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special view 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to each start memory and the prefetching result such as the fluctuation pattern by the display mode.

  Further, the second storage display unit 83b displays the decoration special view start storage display corresponding to the second start storage in a one-on-one manner as the first storage display unit 83a. In addition, in FIG. 114 (a), the pre-reading effect which changes the display mode of decoration special figure starting memory display is performed about the 2nd starting memory | storage of a 3rd digesting order.

  On the left side of the first storage display unit 83a, an in-execution storage display unit 84 is provided that displays information related to starting storage corresponding to the currently executing special view variable display game. The special display start storage display at the left end of the first storage display unit 83a or the second storage display unit 83b is transferred to the in-execution storage display unit 84 at the start of the special view variation display game, and the special drawing is executed. The result of the variable display game, the fluctuation pattern and the like are suggested by the display mode.

  In the upper right portion of the display area, a starting memory number display unit 86 for displaying the starting memory number is provided. The starting memory number display unit 86 is provided with a first starting memory number displaying unit 86a for displaying the number of first starting memory and a second starting memory number displaying unit 86b for displaying the number of second starting memory. ing.

  When the second starting memory is digested and decreased from the state shown in FIG. 114 (a), the decorative special drawing start memory display at the left end of the second memory display unit 83b is the second memory display as shown in FIG. 114 (b). It pops out to the upper left of the part 83b, and as shown in FIG. 114 (c), it is displayed to flow into the in-execution storage display part 84. Further, as shown in FIGS. 114 (b) and 114 (c), in the starting memory number display unit 86, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display unit 86b is reduced and the display is displayed in an enlarged manner.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), in the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85, an decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game based on the second start storage is started. Further, in the second memory display unit 83b, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), the decorative special image start memory display pops out above the second memory display unit 83b, and as shown in FIG. 114 (e), Display is performed to return to the second storage display unit 83b so as to shift to the position of.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 114 (f), the decoration special view start memory display of the second memory display unit 83b is shifted to the left one by one from the state of FIG. 114 (a) with the consumption of the second start memory. In addition to being in the state, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 86b is reduced by one. The same decoration display is performed also in the case of the first start storage.

  FIG. 115 shows an example of decoration display (animation) when start memory is generated and increased. When the second start memory is generated from the state shown in FIG. 115 (a), it is located below the second memory display portion 83b as shown in FIGS. 115 (b) and (c) and a new decoration special view start memory display The decoration special drawing start memory display appears from the lower side of the position where is displayed, and the display moving to the upper side is performed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 115 (b) and 115 (c), the second starting memory number display 86b increases the numerical value of the second starting memory number display 86b and displays an enlarged display.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 115 (d), with the increase of the second start memory, the decorative memory start area display in the second memory display portion 83b is increased by one from the state of FIG. 115 (a). At the same time, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 86b is increased by one. The same decoration display is performed also in the case of the first start storage.

  FIGS. 116 and 117 show an example of the process of setting and executing the specific effect. As shown in FIG. 116, when there are four of Z, A, B and C as the first start memory (t11), game Z, which is a special view fluctuation display game based on the first start memory Z, is started (T12). At this time, the information is not stored in the specific effect information storage area (see FIG. 117A).

  During the execution of the game Z, a new first start memory D is generated, and the execution of the advance notice effect (specific effect) for the first start memory D is determined (t13). At this time, for the first start memories A to D to be subjected to the advance notice effect, the contents of the effect in the special view variation display game are determined, and the information is stored in the corresponding area of the specific effect information storage area (see FIG. 117 (b)).

  Then, game Z ends, and game A, which is a special view variation display game based on first start memory A, is started (t14). The game A to the game D are specified effect periods in which the specified effect is executed based on the information stored in the specified effect information storage area. At the start of game A, the countdown notice "not displayed" is performed as a specific effect to be executed in the special view variable display game with reference to the information stored in the first region of the first start-up memory in the specific effect information storage area. Is set. In addition, the information stored in the first area of the first start-up storage in the specific effect information storage area is copied to the in-execution area. Thus, although it is a specific production period, the period when it is selected not to display a specific production becomes a standby period. Further, since the digesting order of the first starter memories B to D is advanced with the digestion of the first starter memory A, the first information of the digesting order in the first starter memory in the specific effect information storage area is erased. The subsequent information in the first starting memory is carried up one by one (see FIG. 117 (c)).

  After that, the game A ends, and the game B, which is a special view variable display game based on the first start memory B, is started (t15). At the start of game B, with reference to the information stored in the first region of the first start-up memory in the specific effect information storage area, the countdown notice as a specific effect to be executed in the special view variable display game "Is set. In addition, the information stored in the first area of the first start-up storage in the specific effect information storage area is copied to the in-execution area. Furthermore, since the digestion order of the first startup memories C and D is advanced along with the digestion of the first startup memory B, the first information of the digestion order in the first startup memory in the specific effect information storage area is erased. At the same time, the subsequent information in the first starting memory is carried up one by one (see FIG. 117 (d)).

  When the game B is over, a game C which is a special view variation display game based on the first start memory C is started (t16). At the start of game C, with reference to the information stored in the first region of the first start-up memory in the specific effect information storage area, the countdown notice "count 1" is performed as a specific effect to be executed in the special view variable display game. "Is set. In addition, the information stored in the first area of the first start-up storage in the specific effect information storage area is copied to the in-execution area. As a result, in the game C, an effect of displaying “1” indicating that it is one before the special figure change display game to be notified is performed. As described above, the specific effect period, in which the specific effect is selected to be displayed, is the execution period. Further, since the digesting order of the first starter memory D is advanced with the digesting of the first starter memory C, the first information of the digest order in the first starter memory in the specific effect information storage area is erased, Subsequent information in the first starting memory is carried up one by one (see FIG. 117 (e)).

  Then, when the game C ends, the game D, which is a special view variation display game based on the first start memory D, is started (t17). At the start of game D, with reference to the information stored in the first region of the first start-up memory in the specific effect information storage area, the countdown notice "count 0" is performed as a specific effect to be executed in the special view variable display game. "Is set. In addition, the information stored in the first area of the first start-up storage in the specific effect information storage area is copied to the in-execution area. As a result, in the game D, an effect of displaying “0” indicating that the game is a special figure variation display game to be notified is executed. Further, along with the digestion of the first start-up memory D, the first information of the digestion order in the first start-up memory in the specific effect information storage area is erased (see FIG. 117 (f)).

  The first start memory D is a start memory for executing the last special view variation display game (specifically, the special view change display game for the advance notice in the case of preview advance notice effect) for executing the specific effect. The final flag is set for this. As a result, it can be understood that the specific effect is ended in the special image variation display game this time, the specific effect flag is cleared, and the specific effect is ended. Then, when the game D ends, the information of the in-execution area is cleared (see FIG. 9A).

  FIGS. 118 and 119 also show an example of the process of setting and executing the specific effect. The portion different from FIG. 116 in FIG. 118 is the portion where the generation of the second starting memory and its digestion are performed at t21, t22, t23 and t24, and the other portion is the same as FIG. The code is attached and the description is omitted.

  When game Z ends and game A, which is a special view variation display game based on first start memory A, is started (t14), the first start memory storage order in the specific effect information storage area is set to the first area. The countdown notice "no display" is set as a specific effect to be executed in the special view variable display game with reference to the stored information. In addition, the information stored in the first area of the first start-up storage in the specific effect information storage area is copied to the in-execution area. Further, since the first start-up memories B to D are advanced in the process of the first start-up memory A, the first information on the first start-up memory in the specific effect information storage area is erased. At the same time, the subsequent information in the first starting memory is carried up one by one (see FIGS. 119 (a) and 117 (c)).

  When the second starting memory E is generated during the execution of the game A (t21), the information of the area under execution is copied to the first starting area of the second starting memory, which is the area corresponding to the second starting memory E (See FIG. 119 (b)). When the game A is over, a game E which is a special view variable display game based on the second start memory E is started (t22). Accordingly, the countdown notice "no display" is set as a specific effect to be executed in the special view variation display game with reference to the information stored in the first region of the second start storage in the specific effect information storage area. Be done. In addition, the information stored in the first area of the second start-up storage in the specific effect information storage area is copied to the in-execution area. Further, along with the digestion of the second start-up memory E, the first information of the digestion order in the second start-up memory in the specific effect information storage area is erased (see FIG. 119 (c)). That is, when a new second start memory is generated during execution of the specific effect for the special view variation display game based on the first start memory, the specific effect under execution is selected based on the second start memory. It will be possible to execute also in the figure fluctuation display game.

  In addition, when game B is started after the end of game E, and this game B is ended and game C, which is a special view change display game based on the first start memory C, is started (t16), the specific effect information storage area The countdown notice "count 1" is set as a specific effect to be executed in the special view variable display game with reference to the information stored in the first region of the first start-up memory in the first start-up memory. In addition, the information stored in the first region of the first start-up storage order in the specific effect information storage area is copied to the area under execution (see FIGS. 119 (d) and 117 (e)). As a result, in the game C, an effect of displaying “1” indicating that it is one before the special figure change display game to be notified is performed. Further, since the digesting order of the first starter memory D is advanced with the digesting of the first starter memory C, the first information of the digest order in the first starter memory in the specific effect information storage area is erased, The subsequent information in the first starting memory is carried up one by one (see FIGS. 119 (d) and 117 (e)).

  When the second starting memory F is generated during the execution of the game C (t23), information of the executing area is copied to the first memory area of the second starting memory (see FIG. 119 (f)). When the game C ends, the game F, which is a special view variation display game based on the second start memory F, is started (t24). Accordingly, the countdown notice "count 1" is set as a specific effect to be executed in the special view fluctuation display game with reference to the information stored in the first start-up area in the second start-up memory in the specific effect information storage area. Be done. In addition, the information stored in the first area of the second start-up storage in the specific effect information storage area is copied to the in-execution area. Further, as the second start-up memory F is digested, the first information of the digestion order in the second start-up memory in the specific effect information storage area is erased (see FIG. 119 (f)).

  If a new second start storage occurs during the execution of game E or game F, the information on the in-execution area is copied to the corresponding area of the specific effect information storage area, so that the second start storage is performed. In the special image variation display game based on the above, the specific effect currently being executed is repeatedly performed. In addition, even when a plurality of new second starting memories are generated during one game, the information in the executing area is copied to each area of the specific effect information storage area, and therefore, it is possible to In the figure variable display game, the specific effect currently being executed is repeatedly performed.

  However, if the second start memory occurs during the execution of game D, which is the last special-figure variation display game for executing a specific effect (the special-figure variation display game targeted for advance notice in the case of prefetching announcement effect), Since the specific effect flag is cleared at the start of the game D, the information on the area being executed for the second start storage is not copied. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed in the special view variable display game based on the second start memory. Note that, even when the specific effect flag is cleared, the specific effect is not executed in the special view change display game based on the second start storage.

  In addition, for example, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game executed by interrupting as in the game E or the game F becomes a special result, the specific effect flag is cleared. This prevents the specific effect from being resumed after the end of the special game state. In this case, the information in the specific effect information storage area may be cleared, but if the specific effect flag is cleared, the information in the specific effect information storage area is not referred to, and new information Since the information of the specific effect information storage area is overwritten when the execution of the specific effect is set, the information of the specific effect information storage area may not be cleared.

  Moreover, in the special view variation display game based on the new second start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect for the first start memory, the specific effect which was being executed at the time of the generation of the second start memory is repeated Although it is supposed to be performed, exactly the same effect as the specific effect being executed may be performed, or a part may be changed. For example, the effect display, the background color and content, and the sound may be made different. As an example of making the contents of the effect display different, every time when the effect of the countdown advance notice 1 is repeated, the special view variation display game based on the second start memory is executed, “count 1-1” → “count 1 A part of the value may be changed as “−2” → “count 1-3”. Also, the value may be changed as “count 0.9” → “count 0.8” → “count 0.7”.

  In addition, in the special view fluctuation display game based on the new second start memory generated during execution of the specific effect for the first start memory, the specific effect may not be performed. Also, depending on the contents of the special view change display game based on the first start storage of the advance notice target, whether to execute the specific effect in the special view change display game based on the second start storage may be selected. good. For example, when the result of the special view variation display game based on the first starting memory of the advance target becomes a special result, the specific effect is executed in the special view variation display game based on the second starting memory than when the special result is not obtained. Be more likely to be

  Also, in the special view variation display game based on the new second start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect for the first start memory, the content of the specific effect to be executed later may be suggested or notified. good. Since the content of the specific effect is already determined and stored in the specific effect information storage area, it is possible to refer to this information to suggest or notify the content. In particular, if it is a waiting period during which it is a specific effect period but the display has not been started, it may be notified by suggesting that the specific effect is to be executed later or displaying the content as a digest. It is.

  In addition, when the execution of the specific effect is determined, the content of the specific effect in the special view variation display game based on each start memory is determined, but other information may be determined. good. For example, the stop symbol of the decoration special figure variation display game in the special figure variation display game based on each start memory may be determined. In this case, it is possible to set the effect based on the stop symbol, such as setting the same stop symbol in all the special view variation display games, or decreasing the value of the middle symbol one by one like the countdown notice. . In addition, when a new second start memory occurs during execution of the specific effect for the first start memory, the stop symbol of the special view variation display game under execution is a special drawing based on the second start memory. Information on the stop symbol may be copied and set so as to be the stop symbol of the variable display game. However, when the stop symbol of the special figure variation display game being executed becomes a special result, it is not copied.

  Further, although the specific effect is set for the special figure change display game, the specific effect may be set for the common view change display game. In the case of executing preview advance notice effect of the common drawing change display game as the specific effect, prefetch processing for determining information such as a result before the start of the common drawing change display game based on the common drawing start storage for the common drawing start memory. To do. In addition, the specific effect for the common view change display game and the specific effect for the special view change display game may be performed at the same time or may not be performed at the same time.

  From the above, the variable display game is executed based on the detection of the game ball in the start winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, common drawing start gate 34), and the result of the variable display game is a special result In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state for giving a predetermined gaming value to the player when it becomes, a predetermined upper limit of the starting memory that becomes the right to execute the variable display game based on the detection of the gaming ball in the starting winning area A game in which the result of the variable display game is determined based on the start storage means (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing up to a number together with random numbers and the random number values stored as start storage in the start storage means The execution means (game control apparatus 100) and the effect that is to be executed in the fluctuation display game that has not been executed yet is an effect that is determined in advance before the start of the fluctuation display game. The effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling an effect is provided, and when the effect control means decides to execute the specific effect, it is executed in each of the variable display games to be the object of the specific effect. It will be set beforehand about the execution content of the said specific presentation. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect which is easy to be recognized by the player without contradiction by simple control. Moreover, it is not necessary to refer to the current progress of the specific effect (how many times it is, etc.), and the burden of control can be reduced.

  The game control apparatus 100 further includes predetermination means (game control apparatus 100) for determining a random number value stored as start memory in the start memory before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed. It will be possible to decide to execute the specific effect based on the determination result of the prior determination means. Therefore, it is possible to execute a specific effect of suggesting or notifying the determination result of the prior determination means.

  In addition, the starting winning area comprises a first starting winning area (starting winning opening 36) and a second starting winning area (normal fluctuation winning device 37), and the starting storage means is a game in the first starting winning area The first starting memory is stored as the starting memory based on the detection of the ball, and the second starting memory is stored as the starting memory based on the detection of the gaming ball in the second starting winning area, and the game executing means is the second starting memory In some cases, the variable display game based on the second start memory is configured to be executed prior to the variable display game based on the first start memory, and the effect control means is configured to perform the change based on the first start memory If a new second start memory is generated during the execution of the specific effect for the display game, it is possible to execute the specific effect in progress also in the variable display game based on the second start memory It will be. Therefore, even if the variable display game based on the second start memory is interrupted during execution of the specific effect for the first start memory, the specific effect can be prevented from being interrupted.

  Further, when it is determined that the specific effect is to be performed, the effect control means sets in advance stop symbols to be displayed as a result mode for each of the variable display games to be the target of the specific effect, and is based on the first start memory When a new second start memory is generated during execution of the specific effect for the variable display game, the stop symbol of the variable display game based on the second start memory is the stop symbol of the variable display game under execution It is possible to make it the same stop symbol. Therefore, the stop symbol can also be part of the specific effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. Moreover, since the same stop symbol is used when the variable display game based on the second start memory is interrupted during execution of the specific effect for the first start memory, the process of separately determining the stop symbol becomes unnecessary and control is performed. The burden can be reduced.

  Next, the operation of the board effect device 44 will be described. The first board effect device 44a, the second board effect device 44b, and the third board effect device 44c, which are board effect devices 44 that perform game effects including special view variation display games by operating, are shown in FIG. The effect combination object switch 47 for detecting the state in the initial position is provided, and the effect control device 300 can detect whether it is in the initial position or not. When the board effect device 44 is operated, if the board effect device 44 performing the operation is not at the initial position, processing corresponding to this is performed.

  FIG. 120 shows an example of the operation of the first board rendering device 44a. Here, as shown in the upper part of the planned operation, it is planned to perform effects (t61 to t62, t63 to t65, t66 to t67, t68 to t69) in which the operation from the initial position to return to the initial position is intermittently performed plural times. It has become. In addition, decoration LED of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 which make up the light emission effect device capable of performing the light emission effect corresponding to the operation of the movable effect member emits the light emission effect according to the operation of the first panel effect device 44a It is planned to do. Note that the decoration LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 can independently perform the effect by the light emission even during a period in which the light emission effect according to the operation of the first panel rendering device 44a is not performed.

  However, as shown in the lower part of the actual operation, the operation was started from the initial position (t61), but the first panel rendering device 44a does not operate normally due to some reason, and the initial operation is also performed at the next scheduled operation timing (t63) It has not returned to the position. In this case, after returning to the initial position (t64), all subsequent scheduled operations are not performed. However, for the decoration LED, the light emission is performed at the scheduled timing.

  FIG. 121 shows an example of the operation of the first board rendering device 44a, the second board rendering device 44b, and the third board rendering device 44c. As shown in FIG. 121 (a), as the scheduled operation, first, the first board rendering device 44a operates from the initial position (t71), returns to the initial position (t72), and then the second board rendering device 44b The third board rendering device 44c is operated from the initial position (t73), and is scheduled to perform rendering to return to the initial position (t74). In addition, the decoration LED of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 performs the corresponding light emission rendering according to the operation of the first panel rendering device 44a (t71 to t72), and the second panel rendering device 44b and the third panel rendering It is planned to perform the corresponding light-emitting effect according to the operation of the device 44c (t73 to t75).

  However, as shown as an actual operation, although the first board rendering device 44a is operated from the initial position (t71), the second board rendering device 44b and the third board rendering device 44c do not operate normally due to any cause. Even at the scheduled operation timing (t73), the state has not returned to the initial position. In this case, the second board rendering apparatus 44b whose operation range does not overlap with the first board rendering apparatus 44a operates as scheduled because no problems such as collision occur even if it operates (t73 to t75).

  In addition, with the third board effect device 44c whose operation range overlaps with the first board effect device 44a, there is a possibility that a problem such as a collision may occur if the operation is performed. Therefore, the start of the operation is awaited until the first board effect device 44a returns to the initial position (t74), and the operation scheduled from here is performed (t74 to t76). That is, the end of the operation is delayed by the same time (t75 to t76) by the time (t73 to t74) at which the start of the operation is delayed. Further, in the display device 41, a specific waiting effect is displayed during a period (t73 to t74) in which the operation of the third board rendering device 44c is delayed. As a result, the display on the display device 41 and the operation of the third board rendering device 44c do not feel uncomfortable. Note that the decoration LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 perform light emission effects at scheduled timing regardless of the operation of the panel effect device 44.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), when the time (t73 to t74) waiting for the start of the operation until the first board rendering device 44a returns to the initial position becomes a predetermined time or more, the schedule The operation of the third board rendering device 44c which has been performed is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation at a timing largely deviated from the scheduled timing or the completion of the operation by the end of the special view variation display game, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the amusement of the game.

Movable body control processing
FIG. 122 shows the movable body control process (step C19) in the main process described above. In this movable body control process, first, a first board effect device is set as a process target (step C601), and a standby setting process is performed (step C602). Thereafter, the second board effect device is set as the process target (step C603), the standby setting process is performed (step C604), and the third board effect device is set as the process target (step C605), and the standby setting process is performed. (Step C606). Then, an operation control process is performed to control the motor and the solenoid so that the set operation is performed (step C607), and the movable body control process is ended. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling the operation of the board effect device 44 forming the movable effect device.

[Wait setting process]
FIG. 123 shows the standby setting process (steps C602, C604, C606) in the movable body control process described above. In the standby setting process, first, it is determined whether there is an operation standby flag of its own (step C611). The operation standby flag is a flag that is set when waiting for the start of the operation. A first operation standby flag, a second operation standby flag, and a third operation standby flag are prepared corresponding to the first board effect device 44a, the second board effect device 44b, and the third board effect device 44c, respectively. A flag corresponding to the board effect device 44 waiting for the start of is set. For example, when waiting for the start of the operation of the first board effect device 44a, the first operation standby flag is set. Further, the operation standby flag of its own is a flag that is set when waiting for the start of the operation of the board effect device 44 currently being processed, for example, the standby setting process (step C602). For example, the first operation standby flag set when waiting for the operation of the first board rendering device 44a becomes the own operation standby flag.

  If there is the operation standby flag of its own (step C611; Y), that is, if it is waiting for its own operation, it proceeds to step C613. If there is no operation standby flag of itself (step C611; N), it is determined whether it is the operation start timing of itself (step C612). The operation start timing of its own is the operation start timing set at the start of the special figure variation display game. For example, in the case of the first board effect device 44a, t61, t63, t66, t68 in FIG. 120 and t71 in FIG. 121 are operation start timings. If it is not the operation start timing of its own (step C612; N), the standby setting process is ended. If it is the operation start timing of its own (step C612; Y), it is determined whether the own is at the initial position (step C613).

  If it is not in the initial position (step C613; N), it cancels its subsequent operation (step C621), clears its operation standby timer (step C622), and clears its operation standby flag. (Step C623) The standby setting process ends. That is, in this case, it is a case where one's own operation is awaited, or one's own operation is not started in spite of being an operation start timing, and there is some abnormality in one's own operation. For this reason, the setting is made so as not to perform its own operation, and the operation standby flag and the timer that counts the operation standby time are cleared.

  In addition, when canceling the subsequent operation of its own, it is possible not to perform the operation only for the special figure variation display game, or to perform the operation from the special figure variation display game to several games. The operation may not be performed until the game machine is powered on again. In this case, the error notification may be performed by the gaming machine, or the occurrence of an error may be notified to an external device such as an intermediate machine or a hall computer.

  If the mobile terminal itself is in the initial position (step C613; Y), it is determined whether the interfering one is in the initial position (step C614). In the present embodiment, the first board rendering device 44a and the third board rendering device 44c interfere with each other. If the interfering one is in the initial position (step C614; Y), it is determined whether its own operation waiting flag is present (step C615), and if its own operation waiting flag is not present (step C615; N), the operation is performed The start is set (step C618), and the standby setting process is ended. In this case, the operation is started as scheduled. Information required for the operation is set by setting the operation start, and the actual operation control is performed in the operation control process (step C 607) based on this information.

  If there is an operation standby flag of its own (step C615; Y), it clears its operation standby timer (step C616), clears its own operation standby flag (step C617), and sets the operation start. Then (step C618), the standby setting process ends. In this case, although the operation has been awaited, the operation is started because the operation becomes possible.

  On the other hand, if there is nothing in the initial position to interfere (step C614; N), it is determined whether there is an operation standby flag of itself (step C619), and if there is no operation standby flag of itself (step C619; N) , Save the initial value to its own operation standby timer for measuring time waiting for its own operation (step C 624), set its own operation standby flag (step C 625), and end the standby setting processing Do. This starts a period of waiting for its own operation.

  If there is an operation standby flag of its own (step C619; Y), it is determined whether its own operation standby timer has timed out (step C620). If the time is not up (step C620; N), the standby setting process is ended. If the time is up (step C620; Y), the subsequent operation of its own is canceled (step C621), its own operation standby timer is cleared (step C622), and its operation standby flag is cleared ((step C622) Step C623) The standby setting process ends. That is, in this case, the time for waiting for its own operation is equal to or longer than a predetermined time, and in this case, its own operation is not performed. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a timekeeping means for measuring the time to delay the start of the operation of one movable effect member.

  In the above description, although it is assumed that the interfering board effect device 44 waits for its own operation until it returns to the initial position, it can move to a position where it does not interfere if it can detect that it has moved to a position where it does not interfere. You may start your own operation. In addition, even when the interfering board effect device 44 is at a position where there is a possibility of interference, even if it is a range where the operation range of its own in the present effect does not reach the interfering position, the operation is performed. good. In addition, the operation standby timer counts the standby time for each of the panel effect devices 44, but only one operation standby timer is used, and the operation standby of the panel effect device 44 is started from the time when the operation standby is first started. It is also possible to measure the time until the end of the program.

  From the above, it is possible to execute the game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition, and in the gaming machine which generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. A movable effect device (panel effect device 44) for performing a game effect by operating a effect member, and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the movable effect device, the effect control means being movable When the operation of the effect member is started, if the operation start position is not present, the operation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the movable effect apparatus in which the abnormality has occurred, and to appropriately cope with the problem of the gaming machine. In addition, the movable effect apparatus which performs the effect of a game may perform effects of a special figure change display game, or may perform an effect of a common drawing change display game, and both change displays The game may be directed. Further, for example, effects other than those related to the variable display game, such as effects in a wait for customer state, may be performed, and any effect may be performed as long as it is an effect to be executed in the gaming machine. The movable effect device is not limited to the panel effect device 44, and may be a frame effect device provided on the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15.

  In addition, it is controlled by the production control means, it has the luminous production device which can do the luminous production which corresponds to the operation of the movable production component (the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) Even when the operation of (1) is not performed, the light emission effect by the light emission effect apparatus is performed as scheduled. Therefore, the decoration by the light emission will be performed even if the effect by the operation of the movable effect device is stopped, and the remarkable decrease of the decorativeness can be prevented, and the decrease of the amusement of the game can be prevented.

  In addition, a plurality of movable effect devices are provided, and when the operation of one movable effect member is started, the effect control means may simultaneously operate even when another movable effect member is not present at a predetermined position. When the members do not interfere with each other, the operation of the one movable effect member is started, and when the two members operate simultaneously, when the movable effect members interfere with each other, the operation of the one movable effect member is not performed. Become. Therefore, it is possible to operate the movable effect device in a range that does not affect, and it is possible to prevent the remarkable decrease of the decorativeness and the decrease of the amusement of the game.

  In the gaming machine which executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the game results in a special result, the movable effect member is A plurality of movable effect devices (panel effect device 44) performing effects of the game by operating, and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the movable effect devices, the effect control means is one of When starting the operation of the movable effect member, if the other movable effect members do not exist at the predetermined position and the movable effect members interfere with each other when operated simultaneously, the other movable effect members are one movable The start of the operation of the one movable effect member is delayed until it moves to a position where it does not interfere with the effect member. Therefore, when an abnormality occurs in another movable effect device, the operation of one movable effect device can be made to stand by, and the problem of the gaming machine can be appropriately dealt with.

  In addition, a light emission effect device (panel decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) which can be controlled by the effect control means and capable of performing light emission effect corresponding to the operation of the movable effect member is provided. Even when the start of the operation of the effect member is delayed, the light emission effect by the light emission effect apparatus is performed as scheduled. Therefore, the decoration by the light emission is performed even if the effect by the operation of the movable effect device is delayed, and the decrease in the decorativeness can be prevented and the decrease in the interest of the game can be prevented.

  Further, the effect control means is provided with a time counting means (effect control device 300) for measuring the time for delaying the start of the operation of one movable effect member, and the time kept by the time measuring means exceeds a predetermined value. The operation of the one movable effect member is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent that one movable effect device operates at a timing largely deviated from the scheduled timing, or that the operation is not completed by the end of the special view variable display game, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest of the game.

  In addition, it is provided with the display device 41 which is controlled by the effect control means and performs the effect display regarding the game, and the effect control means displays a specific waiting effect during a period in which the start of the operation of one movable effect member is delayed. It will be displayed on the device. Therefore, even if the effect by the operation of the movable effect device is delayed, a separate decoration is performed, and it is possible to prevent a significant decrease in the decorativeness and to prevent a decrease in the fun of the game.

  Although the decoration LED of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 performs the light emission effect at the scheduled timing regardless of the operation of the panel effect device 44, there is a delay in the start of the operation and the cancellation of the operation In this case, the start of the light emission effect may be delayed or canceled accordingly. That is, it is provided with a light emission effect device (panel decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) which can be controlled by the effect control means (effect control device 300) and capable of performing the light emission effect corresponding to the operation of the movable effect member The means may delay the start of the light emission effect of the light emitting effect device so as to correspond to the operation of the one movable effect member when the start of the operation of the one movable effect member is delayed. In this way, it is possible to synchronize the effect by the movable effect device and the effect by the light emission effect device, and to prevent the decrease in the decorativeness and the decrease in the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, when the delaying time exceeds the predetermined value, the operation of the one movable effect member is not performed, and the light emission effect device (panel decoration device 46 corresponding to the operation of the movable effect member) The light emission effect of the frame decoration device 18) may not be performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the action and light emission effect from being completed by the operation and light emission at a timing largely shifted from the scheduled timing of one movable effect device, and by the end of the special view variation display game. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the time in which the board effect device 44 can stand by can be set in accordance with the timing of the special view change display game of the action and the result of the special view change display game. For example, if it is possible to omit a part of the later presentation if the operation still has time to spare, such as at the beginning or the middle of the special figure variation display game, this is taken into consideration. Time can be set. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a special result, there is no problem even if the operation of the board effect device 44 continues until the special gaming state, so the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost It is possible to make the waiting time longer than in the case of The same applies to the case of delaying the start of the light-emitting effect in the decoration LED of the panel decoration device 46 or the frame decoration device 18. This can also indicate or notify that there may be a special result.

  Further, when the operation start of the board effect device 44 is delayed, a part of the operation may be omitted so that the influence of the delay may be reduced. For example, when the operation start of the board effect device 44 is delayed, the initial position may be returned to the initial position at the end timing originally planned even during the operation. Alternatively, a plurality of operation patterns having different operation times may be prepared, and an operation pattern may be selected according to the standby time so as to reduce the deviation from the originally scheduled end timing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 120, when it is not in the initial position at the scheduled operation timing of the panel rendering device 44, it is stated that the subsequent operations of the panel rendering device 44 are not performed. As long as the initial position is returned at the timing, the operation may be performed.

  Next, the sub information display device 90 will be described. As shown in FIG. 124 (a), the sub information display device 90 is a single unit that forms a sub game display unit that displays a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special view variable display game corresponding to the first special view variable display game. Of the first sub game display unit 91 configured by the light emitting unit L5, and a single sub game display unit for displaying a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special view variable display game corresponding to the second special view variable display game And a second sub game display unit 92 configured by the light emitting unit L6. Furthermore, a first sub display unit 93 indicating the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special view variation display game by two light emitting units L1 and L2, and a second special display by two light emitting units L3 and L4. And a second sub display unit 94 indicating the number of second start memories, which is the right to execute the figure variation display game. In addition, although the code | symbol of L1-L6 is displayed on each light emission part in FIG. 124 (a) for description, it may or may not actually display.

  FIG. 124 (b) shows display modes in the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94. Each of the display units is configured to display the number of reservations by two light emitting units, and in the case of the number of reservations 0, any one is turned off, in the case of number 1 the one is turned off and the other is lit. In the case of the number of holdings 3, one is lit and the other blinks, and in the case of the number of holdings 4, both are blinked.

  Such a display mode is selected every about 133 ms by selecting the special view 1 shown in FIG. 124 (c) and the special view 2 sub hold count display tables 1 and 2 according to the value of bit 2 of the sub blink display timer area. The table is alternately selected, and the selected table is realized by referring to the current number of reservations and setting the corresponding display mode.

  The sub-flashing display timer according to the present embodiment uses the 8-bit sub-flashing display timer area provided in the RAM 322 or the like to update +1 in the decoration control process (step C18) performed every frame switching timing (1/30 second). It consists of. Then, it is determined whether or not the output of bit 2 of the sub blink display timer area is on timing (is 1), and the sub hold number display table is selected. Since the value of bit 2 is switched between 0 and 1 every about 133 ms, it is possible to control turn-off and turn-on in units of about 133 ms. Of course, it is also possible to control turning off and on in units of shorter or longer time with reference to other bits.

  FIG. 124 (c) shows the contents of each of the sub-holding number display tables 1 and 2. As shown in FIG. 124 (b), the display mode corresponding to the number of reservations in each display unit is the same, and the content of the sub-holding number display table is also the same. The special view 1 sub hold display tables 1 and 2 control the display modes of L1 and L2, and the special view 2 sub hold display tables 1 and 2 control the display modes of L3 and L4.

  For example, in the case of the number of holdings 1, L 1 and L 3 are turned off by selecting both lights off in sub holding display tables 1 and 2 and L 2 and L 4 are turned off in both holding displays 1 and 2 It becomes a lighting state by being selected. Further, in the case of the number of holdings 3, lighting is selected for both L1 and L3 in the sub-holding display tables 1 and 2 and the lighting state is achieved. With respect to L2 and L4, lighting is selected in the hold display table 1, and in the sub-hold display table 2, turning off is selected, so that lighting and turning off are repeated at approximately every 133 ms.

  That is, if the value of the sub blink display timer is in a predetermined turn-off range (here, the range of bit 2 is 0) when it is set to be in the blink state, it is turned off and other than the turn-off range (here, bit 2 is in 1 range) If so, turn it on. Further, in the display mode of at least the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94, the turn-off range in the case of the blinking state is a common range.

  Furthermore, the sub blink display timer is constantly updated, and even if the number of reservations changes, the sub blink display timer is not reset or another value is not set. Therefore, when shifting to the blinking state, the light emitting state is either lighting or extinguishing according to the value of the sub blinking display timer after the number of holding changes. For example, L1 and L3 change from lit state to blinked state when changing from 3 pending numbers to 4 pending numbers, but the value of the sub blink display timer at the time of change is the value that selects the sub hold display table 1 (bit When 2 is 1), lighting is continued, and when 2 is a value for selecting the sub hold display table 2 (bit 2 is 0), it is turned off immediately.

  In addition, when the number of reservations changes and shifts from blinking to lighting, the value of the sub blink display timer after the number of reservations changes is the value for selecting the sub suspension display table 1 (bit 2 is 1). If there is, lighting will be continued, and if it is a value for selecting the sub hold display table 2 (bit 2 is 0), it will be changed from lighting to lighting immediately. That is, when the blinking state ends, if the current light emitting state is different from the transitioned light emitting state, the light emitting state is immediately changed. In this case, there is no case of transition from the blinking state to the extinguished state, but if there is such a transition, extinguishing is maintained if the current light emitting state is extinguished as described above, and the current light emitting state is If it is on, it will be changed to off immediately.

  In the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92, the light emitting unit L5 or L6 is blinked to indicate that the fluctuation display is being performed during the fluctuation display of the corresponding special view fluctuation display game. The display during the variable display is realized by switching on and off about every 133 ms according to the value of bit 2 of the sub blink display timer area as shown in FIG. 124 (d). The on and off periods in the blink display are synchronized with the on and off periods in the blink display on the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94.

  In addition, the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92 display the game result as the lighting mode or the lighting color according to the game result along with the end of the corresponding special view variable display game. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124 (e), the light is turned off in the case of deviation, and the light is turned on in the case of big hit or small hit. In addition, the display mode in the case of the small hit may be a display mode different from the removal or the big hit. For example, you may make it blink in the aspect different from the blink in fluctuation | variation. Further, in the sub game display unit which is not executing the corresponding special view variation display game, the display of the previous result is maintained.

  By controlling the light emission mode as described above, the blinking timing is synchronized in the first sub game display unit 91, the second sub game display unit 92, the first sub display unit 93, and the second sub display unit 94, The visibility of the display and the decorativeness are enhanced. In addition, blinking control of a plurality of light emitting units can be performed by one sub blinking display timer, and the burden of control can be reduced. That is, the effect control device 300 controls the sub information display device 90 and forms a sub blink display timer for controlling a period in which the light is turned off and a period in which the light is lit in the blink state.

[Sub information display control process]
FIG. 125 shows the sub information display device control process performed in the decoration control process (step C18) in the main process (see FIG. 120). In this sub information display device control processing, first, the sub blink display timer is updated by +1 (step C 701), and it is determined whether or not the output of a specific bit in the sub blink display timer area is on (is 1). (Step C702). As described above, the sub blink display timer according to the present embodiment is configured by performing +1 update in the decoration control processing performed every 1/30 seconds using the 8-bit sub blink display timer region, and the sub blink display timer region It is determined whether or not the output of bit 2 of (1) is on timing. Since the value of bit 2 is switched between 0 and 1 every about 133 ms, it is possible to control turn-off and turn-on in units of about 133 ms. Of course, it is also possible to control turning off and on in units of shorter or longer time with reference to other bits.

  In the case of output on timing (step C702; Y), the special view 1 sub hold number display of the special view 1 sub hold number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode in the first sub display unit 93 is defined. Table 1 is set (step C703), and when it is not the output on timing (step C702; N), the special figure 1 sub hold number display table 2 is set (step C704). Then, display data corresponding to the special drawing 1 sub display holding number is acquired from the set special drawing 1 sub holding number display table and saved in the segment area corresponding to the first sub display unit 93 (step C705). The special figure 1 sub display pending number is set in the special figure 1 pending information setting process (refer to FIG. 112), and here, a value that always matches the actual number of first start memories It is set to be set.

  Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step C706), and in the case of the output on timing (step C706; Y), the special view 2 sub retention with which the display mode in the second sub display section 94 is defined. Of the number display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 sub hold number display table 1 is set (step C 707), and when it is not the output on timing (step C 706; N), the special figure 2 sub hold number display table 2 It sets (step C708). Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 sub display pending number is acquired from the set special figure 2 sub holding number display table, and saved in the segment area corresponding to the second sub display unit 94 (step C709). The special figure 2 sub display pending number is set in the special figure 2 pending information setting process (refer to FIG. 113), and in this case, a value that always matches the actual number of second start memories It is set to be set.

  Next, it is determined whether the sub variation display timer is 0 (step C710). The sub fluctuation display timer manages the fluctuation time of the decoration special drawing fluctuation display game corresponding to the special drawing fluctuation display game, and at the start of the special drawing fluctuation display game, the initial corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special drawing fluctuation display game The value is set.

  If the sub variation display timer is 0 (step C710; Y), that is, if the variation time is not in progress, the sub information display control process is ended. If the sub fluctuation display timer is not 0 (step C710; N), that is, during the fluctuation time, the sub fluctuation display timer is updated by -1, and it is determined whether the time is up, that is, the value becomes 0. (Step C712).

  When the time is up (step C712; Y), the result display table (see FIG. 124 (e)) is set (step C713), display data corresponding to the result is obtained and saved in the corresponding segment area (step C714), the sub information display control process ends. As a result, the result mode corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is displayed.

  If the time is not up (step C712; N), it is determined whether the output on timing is reached (step C715). When the output on timing is reached (step C 715; Y), the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92 are selected from the light emitting units of the display unit corresponding to the special view variation display game being executed. Lighting is set (step C716), and the sub information display control process ends. If the output on timing is not reached (step C715; N), the light emitting unit of the display unit corresponding to the special figure variation display game being executed out of the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92 is turned off. Are set (step C717), and the sub information display control process ends. As a result, during the variable display, the light emitting unit of the display unit corresponding to the special figure change display game being executed among the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92 is in a blinking state. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a display control means for controlling the display of the sub information display device 90.

  From the above, in the gaming machine, the game in which the identification information is variably displayed is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the gaming machine generates a state advantageous to the player. Controlled by the game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect based on the information from the game control means, and the game control means The information display device (collective display device 50) for displaying information related to gaming, and the sub information display device 90 controlled by the effect control means and displaying information related to gaming by the light emitter, the game control means being in the extinguished state The information display apparatus is configured to display information about the game by controlling the light emitter in any one or both of the lighting state, the lighting state, and the blinking state, and the blinking It has a blink display timer (game control device 100) for controlling a light off period and a light on period in the state, and in the case of blinking, if the value of the blink display timer is a predetermined light off range, the light is off Is configured to be controlled to light if it is out of the predetermined turn-off range, and the blink display timer is constantly updated regardless of whether it is in the blink state or not and the start is started when the blink state is started. It starts from the light emission state according to the value of the blink display timer at the hour, and changes the light emission state immediately when the current light emission state and the transition light emission state are different when the blink state ends. It will be done. Therefore, processing such as setting or resetting the timer value is not necessary at the transition to the blinking state or the transition from the blinking state, and the control load can be reduced. Further, by providing the sub information display device 90, it is possible to more reliably notify the player of information on the game.

  Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is configured to control the light-emitting body in any state of either one or both of the light-off state and the lighting state and the blinking state to sub-information about the game A sub-blinking display timer (effect control device 300) for controlling the light-off period and the light-off period in the blinking state is provided to be displayed on the display device 90. It is configured to control to turn off if the value of the display timer is in a predetermined off range, and to turn on if it is out of the predetermined off range, regardless of whether it is blinking or not. Always update and when flashing starts, start from the flash status according to the value of the sub flash display timer at the start, and when the flash status ends, shift to the current flash status Departure If the state is different becomes immediately it has to change the light emission state. Therefore, processing such as setting or resetting the timer value is not necessary at the transition to the blinking state or the transition from the blinking state, and the control load can be reduced.

  In addition, the start memory which becomes the right to execute the game based on the detection of the game ball in the flow area where the flow of game balls can be detected (the start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the common drawing start gate 34) And a game execution unit (game control apparatus 100) for executing a game based on the start storage stored in the start storage unit, The area includes a first inflow area and a second inflow area, and the start storage means stores the first start memory as the start storage based on the detection of the gaming ball in the first inflow area, and the second inflow The second starting memory is stored as the starting memory based on the detection of the gaming ball in the area, and the game executing means executes the first game based on the first starting memory, and the second starting memory is based on the second starting memory. To run 2 games The effect control means (effect control device 300) displays the number of first start memories on the first sub display unit 93 of the sub information display device 90, and the number of second start memories is the sub information display device The game is displayed on the second sub display unit 94 of 90 and displayed at least in a blinking state on the sub game display units 91 and 92 of the sub information display device 90, and the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94 are displayed. The sub game display unit 91, 92 controls the blinking state using a common sub blinking display timer. Therefore, processing such as setting or resetting the timer value is not necessary at the transition to the blinking state or the transition from the blinking state, and the control load can be reduced.

  Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is configured such that the first sub-display unit 93, the second sub-display unit 94, and the sub game display units 91 and 92 have a predetermined turn-off range as a common range. Become. Therefore, the blinking state can be synchronized by the plurality of display units, and the decorativeness and the visibility can be improved.

  Although the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92 perform display using a single light emitting unit, display may be performed using a plurality of light emitting units. For example, two light emitting units are provided so as to blink alternately during variable display. In addition, as a display of the result mode, only one of the two may be turned on in the case of a break, and only the other may be turned on in the case of a hit. Of course, display may be performed by three or more light emitting units. Moreover, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although the sub game display part is divided into the 1st sub game display part 91 and the 2nd sub game display part 92, the 1st special figure fluctuation display game and one sub game display part It is also possible to display a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the second special figure variation display game.

  Further, in the game control apparatus 100, a blinking display timer for controlling the blinking state of the special view 1 suspension display 54, the special view 2 suspension display 55, and the common view suspension display 56 of the batch display device 50; In order to control the blinking state of the first sub game display unit 91, the second sub game display unit 92, the first sub display unit 93, and the second sub display unit 94 in the device 300, the sub blink display timer is synchronized. Also good.

  That is, the update period of the blink display timer and the update period of the sub blink display timer are made the same, and the same initial value is set at a predetermined timing so that the values always become the same. Thus, if the bit referred to by each and the range to be turned off are made the same, the special figure 1 reserve indicator 54, the special figure 2 reserve indicator 55, the general view reserve indicator 56, the first sub game indicator It becomes possible to synchronize the blinking state of any light emitting portion among the 91, the second sub game display portion 92, the first sub display portion 93 and the second sub display portion 94, and the decorativeness and the visibility are improved. Further, even if the reference bit and the range to be turned off are not the same, it is possible to blink with a predetermined periodicity, which also improves the decorativeness and the visibility.

  In the above description, the first sub game display unit 91, the second sub game display unit 92, the first sub display unit 93, and the second sub display unit 94 use the same sub blink display timer and turn off the blink state. By making the periods the same, all are synchronized, but it is also possible to use separate sub blink display timers for some or all of these display parts, or to synchronize as the turn-off period of the blinking state is different. You may not do it.

  Further, in the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92, the light emission mode according to the result is immediately transitioned with the end of the fluctuation time displayed in the blinking state, but the light emission immediately before the transition When the state and the light emitting state according to the result are different, the current light emitting state may be maintained until the light emitting state matching the light emitting state according to the result is achieved. For example, when the light emission state immediately before transition is on but the result is off and it is necessary to shift to off, the value of the bit (here, bit 2) to be referred to in the sub blink display timer area changes and the on period The lighting is maintained until the end of the lighting, and then the lighting is turned off corresponding to the result mode of the shifting. In this way, the light emission state changes in synchronization with the blinking display on the first sub display unit 93 or the second sub display unit 94 at the end of the variable display, and the decorativeness and the visibility are improved. .

  Furthermore, even when the variable display starts, if the light emission state corresponding to the previous result currently displayed is different from the light emission state corresponding to the value of the sub blink display timer area, until both light emission states match. The start of the variable display may be delayed. For example, if the light emission state corresponding to the previous result currently being displayed is the light off corresponding to the out, and when the light emission state turns on according to the value of the blink display timer area when shifting to the blink state, the blink display timer According to the value of the region, it is made not to shift to the blinking state until the start of the light-off period in which the light emission state is turned off. In this way, the light emission state changes in synchronization with the blinking display on the first sub display unit 93 or the second sub display unit 94 at the start of the variable display, and the decorativeness and the visibility are improved. .

  The control to synchronize the blinking state at the start and end of such variable display is performed by the batch display device 50 in the special view 1 display 51, the special view 2 display 52, the general view display 53, and the special view display 53. It is also applicable to the case where the display is controlled using the common blink display timer in order to control the blinking state in FIG. 1 hold display 54, special view 2 hold display 55, and general drawing hold display 56. It is.

  In addition, although the time of the variable display in the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92 is managed by the sub change display timer, the game control device at the end of the change display of the special view fluctuation display game When a stop command is transmitted from 100 to the effect control device 300, the variable display may be stopped upon reception of the stop command. As described above, even when the stop command is received, management of the fluctuation time by the sub fluctuation display timer may be performed in parallel. In this case, the reception of the stop command and the time of the sub fluctuation display timer may be performed. It is also possible to stop the fluctuation display at the earlier one of the ups.

  Further, as described above, in the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92, when the light emission state immediately before the transition is different from the light emission state according to the result, the light emission state according to the result is The current light emission state may be maintained until the light emission state is matched, but such control is performed only when the fluctuation display is ended based on the sub fluctuation display timer having timed out, and stop When the variable display is ended by the reception of the command, the light emission state may be immediately made according to the result regardless of the current light emission state. Of course, when the fluctuation display is ended by the reception of the stop command, the current light emission state may be maintained until it becomes the light emission state corresponding to the light emission state according to the result, or the sub fluctuation display timer has timed up. It is also possible to immediately set the light emission state according to the result only when the variable display is ended based on the above.

First Modification
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. In the gaming machine of the present modification, the updating of the hold display on the collective display device 50 is temporarily put on standby.

[Segment LED editing process]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the segment LED editing process shown in FIG. 126 is performed instead of the segment LED editing process shown in FIG. In this segment LED editing process, either of the common drawing reserve number display tables 1 and 2 is set (steps S503 and S504), and then a display delay process is performed to make the display change wait for a predetermined time (step S901). The display data corresponding to the common drawing display holding number is acquired from the set common drawing holding number display table and saved in the segment area of the common drawing hold display (step S902). The common drawing display holding number is a value of the holding number to be displayed on the common drawing hold display 56, and a period waiting for updating may be a value different from the actual holding number.

  Also, after setting any one of the special figure 1 pending number display tables 1 and 2 (steps S507 and S508), display delay processing is performed to make the display change wait for a certain period of time (step S903). The display data corresponding to the special figure 1 display pending number is acquired from the 1 pending number display table, and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 pending display (step S904). The special figure 1 display pending number is a value of the pending number displayed on the special view 1 pending display 54, and the period of waiting for updating may be a value different from the actual pending number.

  Also, after setting one of the special figure 2 pending number display tables 1 and 2 (steps S511 and S512), display delay processing is performed to make the display change wait for a certain period of time (step S905). The display data corresponding to the special figure 2 display pending number is acquired from the 2 pending number display table, and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 pending display (step S906). The special figure 2 display pending number is a value of the pending number displayed on the special figure 2 pending display 55, and the period waiting for updating may be a value different from the actual pending number.

[Display delay processing]
FIG. 127 shows display delay processing (steps S901, S903, and S905) in the segment LED editing processing described above. In this display delay process, first, the corresponding pre-holding number of holding and the actual holding number, which is the actual holding number, are compared (step S531). The corresponding suspension is suspension currently being processed, and, for example, in the case of display delay processing (step C901) targeting the number of popular diagrams, the normal diagrams are the corresponding pendings. In addition, the pre-hold is the number of holds when the display standby period has elapsed and the actual number of holds has been displayed, as set in step C540 described later.

  If the previous holding number and the actual holding number do not match (step S532; N), it is determined whether there is a corresponding holding standby flag (step S533). The standby flag is a flag set in a period in which the display of the actual number of holdings is awaited. A general drawing standby flag, a special drawing 1 standby flag, and a special drawing 2 standby flag are prepared corresponding to each of the common drawing reservation display, special drawing 1 reservation display, and special drawing 2 reservation display, and display is on standby The flag corresponding to the hold indicator being set is set. For example, when the display of the actual holding number of the common drawing holding number is awaited, the common drawing standby flag is set.

  If there is no corresponding pending wait flag, the corresponding pending wait flag is saved (step S534), and an initial value (for example, 128 ms) is saved in the corresponding pending display wait timer (step S535). Thereafter, the previous hold number is set to the display hold number (step S538), and the display delay process is ended. As a result, the previous hold number will be displayed on the corresponding hold indicator.

  On the other hand, if the number of previous holdings matches the number of actual holdings (step S532; Y) or if there is a corresponding holding standby flag (step S533; Y), the corresponding holding display waiting timer must be 0. For example, -1 is updated (step S536), and it is determined whether the corresponding pending display standby timer is 0, that is, timed up (step S537).

  If the corresponding hold display waiting timer is not 0 (step S537; N), the previous hold number is set to the display hold number (step S538), and the display delay process is ended. Also, if the corresponding pending display standby timer is 0 (step S537; Y), the actual pending number is set to the display pending number (step S539). Then, the actual number of pending is set as the new previous number of pending (step S540), the corresponding pending flag for pending is cleared (step S541), and the display delay process is ended.

  By this display standby process, even if the number of starting memories changes, the number of starting memories displayed on the hold display of the batch display device 50 does not change for a certain period, and the display of the number of starting memories is frequently updated. This prevents the player from having difficulty grasping the display.

  In FIG. 128, when the increase and decrease of the start memory occur a plurality of times within a predetermined time, the display on the hold displays 54 and 55 of the collective display 50, the memory display 83 of the display 41, the number of start memories An example of display on the display unit 86 is shown. Here, there is shown a case where one second starting memory is generated after one second starting memory is digested as a plurality of changes of the number of starting memories.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), first, the first start memory number is 4 and the second start memory number is 3 (t41). The display 55, the second storage display portion 83b of the display device 41, and the second start storage number display portion 86b both display that the second start storage number is three. The first hold display 54 of the collective display 50, the first storage display 83a of the display 41, and the first start storage number display 86a indicate that the first start storage number is four, In this example, the description is omitted because there is no change in the first start storage number, but the same display control as the second hold display 55, the second storage display portion 83b, and the second start storage number display portion 86b described below It has become.

  After that, the special view variation display game based on the second start memory is started, the second start memory is digested and the second start memory number changes to 2 (t42), the second memory display unit 83b of the display device 41, The second starting memory number display unit 86b immediately displays a display according to the change in the starting memory number. On the other hand, in the second hold display 55 of the batch display device 50, the display update processing is delayed by the display delay processing (S510) of the segment LED editing processing (see FIG. 86). Therefore, even if there is a change in the number of starting memories, the display is not immediately changed according to the change, and the display before the change is maintained over the waiting period. Then, when the waiting period has elapsed, the display of the number of starting memories at that time is performed (t43), and here, it is displayed that the second number of starting memories is two.

  Similarly, when the second start memory number is changed to 3 after the second start memory is generated (t44), the second memory display portion 83b of the display device 41 and the second start memory number display portion 86b are immediately A display corresponding to the change in the number of starting memories is performed. On the other hand, in the second hold display 55 of the collective display unit 50, even if there is a change in the number of starting memories, the display prior to the change is maintained over the waiting period without immediately changing the display according to this. Ru.

  FIG. 128 (b) shows an example of the case where the number of start-up memories changes again in the waiting period. That is, the generation (t44) of the second start storage in FIG. 128 (a) is in the standby period. Also in this case, the second storage display unit 83b and the second start storage number display 86b of the display device 41 immediately perform display according to the change in the start storage number. On the other hand, since the second hold display 55 of the collective display unit 50 is in the standby period, the display indicating 3 which is the display before the change of the number of starting memories is maintained, and a new second starting Even if memory occurs, the display does not change.

  Then, when the waiting period has elapsed, the display of the number of starting memories at that time is performed (t43), and here, the display is such that the second number of starting memories is three. That is, even if there is an increase or decrease in the second start storage, it is displayed that the second start storage number is three. In addition, even if there is a change in the starting memory during the waiting period, a new waiting period is not set, and the display of the actual starting memory number is prevented from being performed over a long period of time .

  FIG. 129 shows the display mode in the example of FIG. 128 (b). As shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (f), the special view variation display game based on the second starting memory is started from the state where the second starting memory number is shown to be 3 (t41 in FIG. 128). When the second start-up memory number is changed to 2 after being started and the second start-up memory is digested (t42 in FIG. 128), as shown in FIGS. 129 (b) and 129 (c), the second memory display of the display device 41 In the section 83b and the second starting memory number display portion 86b, the display corresponding to the decrease in the starting memory number is immediately performed. Thereafter, when the second start storage is generated and the second start storage number is changed to 3 (t44 in FIG. 128), as shown in FIGS. 129 (d) and 129 (e), the second storage display unit of the display device 41 A display corresponding to the increase in the number of start memories is immediately displayed on the display 83b and the second start memory number display 86b.

  On the other hand, in the second hold indicator 55 of the collective display unit 50, as shown in FIG. 129 (f) to (h), even if there is a change in the number of starting memories, the change as shown in FIG. 129 (i) The display prior to the change is maintained over the waiting period without immediately changing the display according to. Here, after the second starting memory number decreases to 2, it increases to 3 during the waiting period, and the second starting memory number remains in the state indicating 3 on the display. In FIG. 129 (f) to (h), the lighting state is indicated by hatching and the blinking state is indicated by oblique lines.

  When the number of starting memories changes a plurality of times in a short time such as a waiting period, the decoration display shown in FIG. 129 (b) or (d) is omitted and only display or deletion of the decoration special view starting memory display You may do it. Also, regardless of the standby period, as shown in FIGS. 129 (b) and (d), if a change in the start memory occurs while the decoration display is being performed according to the change in the start memory, the execution is in progress. It is also possible to cancel the decoration display of and display the decoration according to the change of the new start memory.

  Further, although the decorative special drawing start storage display is displayed on the display device 41, the display may be displayed on a second display device other than the display device 41. The second display device may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be a display device configured with an LED. Also, although the display of the first start memory and the second start memory has been described here, the display 41 also displays the display of the common drawing start memory or the second display device for the common drawing start memory. The control may be performed as described above.

  From the above, the variable display game is executed based on the detection of the game ball in the start area (start winning opening 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, common drawing start gate 34), and the result of the variable display game is a special result In the gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to the player when it becomes, the variation display is performed based on the detection of the game control means (the game control device 100) that centrally controls the game and the game ball in the start winning area Start storage means (the game control apparatus 100) capable of storing start memories, which become game execution rights, up to a predetermined upper limit number together with random number values, and information of the start memories controlled by the game control means and stored in the start storage means The start memory display means (collective display device 50) to be displayed, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game based on the information from the game control means, and the effect control means The display control unit 41 can display information of the start storage stored in the start storage unit as the start storage display on the display unit 41, within a predetermined period Even when there is a change in the number of start memories multiple times, the process of change in the predetermined period is displayed without omission, and the game control means has a plurality of changes in the number of start memories in the predetermined period. In this case, the process of change within the predetermined period is omitted and displayed on the start memory display means. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the information of the start memory.

Second Modified Example
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly the different part. explain. The gaming machine of the present modification is configured to temporarily stand by for updating the decorative special drawing start memory display on the display device 41.

[Special figure 1 reservation information setting process]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the special view 1 suspension information setting process shown in FIG. 130 is performed instead of the special view 1 suspension information setting process shown in FIG. In this special view 1 suspension information setting process, when the new suspension number and the previous suspension number are not the same (step C 503; N), it is determined whether or not the decoration special view start storage display is waiting for update (step C 651).

  If it is not waiting to update the decorative special drawing start storage display (step C651; N), the initial value (for example, 128 ms) is saved in the update standby timer (step C652), and the processes after step C504 are performed. By this processing, the decoration display (animation) in the decoration special drawing start memory display along with the increase or decrease in the number of reservations is set, but in this case, the decoration special drawing start memory display of The display is set to start the decoration display while increasing or decreasing.

  On the other hand, if the decoration special drawing start storage display is waiting for update (step C651; Y), the index of the motion control table for continuous change corresponding to the new number of reservations is calculated and saved (step C653). The timer is cleared (step C654), and the processes after step C525 are performed. This process sets an increase or decrease in decoration special drawing start memory display and decoration display (animation) along with an increase or decrease in the number of starting memories, but in this case, setting in step C504 when not waiting for updating. Cancel the displayed display and set the display for continuous change.

  The display for continuous change is a content that displays the change in the previous start memory number and the change in the current start memory number collectively. If the previous change in the number of starting memories and the change in the number of starting memories this time are the increase and decrease of the number of starting memories, display will be displayed after decreasing display regardless of the order of increase and decrease It has become.

[Special figure 2 reservation information setting processing]
Also, in place of the special view 2 suspension information setting process shown in FIG. 113, the special view 2 suspension information setting process shown in FIG. 131 is performed. Also in the special view 2 suspension information setting process, the processes of steps C651 to C654 are performed in the same manner as the special view 1 suspension information setting process described above.

  FIG. 132 shows an example of the updating of the decoration special drawing start storage display in the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 132 (a), a new second start memory is generated in a state where there are three second start memories. Thereby, a display for increasing the decoration special view start memory display and a decoration display accompanying this are set, but this display is a display in which the update for the decoration special figure start memory display is started after a predetermined update waiting time has elapsed. As shown in FIG. 132 (b), the display does not change in the second storage display unit 83b and the second starting storage number display unit 86b during the update waiting time.

  Thereafter, when the second starting memory is stored during the update waiting time, the display set when the update is waiting is canceled and the display for continuous change is set. In this case, although the second starting memory decreases after the increase, in the display for continuous change, as shown in FIGS. 132 (c) and 132 (d), after the display for decreasing the starting memory is performed first, as shown in FIG. 132. As shown in (e) and (f), a series of displays for displaying the start memory increase is performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), a new second start memory is generated in a state where there are three second start memories, and as shown in FIG. If there is no change in the number of starting memories during this update waiting time, only a display in which the second starting memory increases as shown in FIGS. 132 (h) and (i) is displayed. This display is a display set when the second start storage has occurred.

  From the above, the effect control means (effect control device 300) performs the display corresponding to the decrease of the start memory regardless of the order of the change when the start memory increases and decreases within the predetermined period. After that, the display corresponding to the increase of the starting memory is performed.

  In addition, also when the starting memory is increased again during the update waiting time after the number of starting memories is increased, the display set when waiting for the update is canceled and the display for continuous change is set. In this case, the display corresponding to the increase of the starting memory for two times is performed. In addition, although the display for continuous change is a content in which the normal display is continuously executed, it may be emphasized that there is a continuous change as different from the normal display.

  Further, the decoration display may be omitted when there is a continuous change. For example, the display of FIGS. 132 (b) and 132 (e) may be omitted and only the decoration special drawing start memory display may be displayed or deleted. That is, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is configured to be able to perform decoration display for decorating the change when the start memory display is changed according to the increase or decrease of the start memory, for a predetermined period In the case where the number of changes in the number of starting memories is changed a plurality of times, the display of the decoration display in the predetermined period is omitted.

  Also, it may be combined with the above-described first modification. In this case, the standby time for temporarily waiting for the update of the hold display on the collective display unit 50 and the update standby time for temporarily waiting for the update of the start storage number display unit 86 on the display unit 41 are the same time. It's also good, and it may be different time.

Third Modified Example
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of the present modification temporarily waits for an update on the sub information display device 90.

  In FIG. 133, when the increase and decrease of the start memory occur a plurality of times within a predetermined time, the display of the start memory number on the display device 41 and the display on the start memory number display 86 and sub information It showed about an example of a display of the sub display part which displays the starting memory number with the display apparatus 90. FIG. Here, there is shown a case where one second starting memory is generated after one second starting memory is digested as a plurality of changes of the number of starting memories.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 133 (a), first, the first start memory number is 4 and the second start memory number is 3 (t81). The portion 83b, the second start storage number display portion 86b, and the second sub display portion 94 of the sub information display device 90 all display that the second start storage number is three. In the first storage display unit 83a of the display device 41, the first start storage number display unit 86a, and the first sub display unit 93 of the sub information display device 90, it is displayed that the first start storage number is four. In this example, the description is omitted because there is no change in the first start storage number, but the second storage display portion 83b, the second start storage number display portion 86b, and the sub information display device 90 of the display device 41 described below. The display control is similar to that of the second sub display unit 94.

  Thereafter, when the second start memory is digested and the second start memory number changes to 2 (t 82) when the special view variable display game based on the second start memory is started (t 82), the second memory display unit 83 b of the display device 41, The second starting memory number display unit 86b immediately displays a display according to the change in the starting memory number. On the other hand, in the second sub display unit 94 of the sub information display device 90, the update of the display is delayed. Therefore, even if there is a change in the number of starting memories, the display is not immediately changed according to the change, and the display before the change is maintained over the waiting period. Then, when the waiting period has elapsed, the display of the number of starting memories at that time is performed (t83), and here, it is displayed that the second number of starting memories is two.

  Also, when the second start storage number is generated and the second start storage number is changed to 3 (t84), the second storage display portion 83b of the display device 41 and the second start storage number display portion 86b are also immediately A display corresponding to the change in the number of starting memories is performed. On the other hand, in the second sub display unit 94 of the sub information display device 90, even if there is a change in the number of starting memories, the display before the change is maintained throughout the standby period without immediately changing the display according to the change. Be done.

  FIG. 133 (b) shows an example of the case where the number of start-up memories changes again in the standby period. That is, the generation (t84) of the second start storage in FIG. 133 (a) is in the standby period. Also in this case, the second storage display unit 83b and the second start storage number display 86b of the display device 41 immediately perform display according to the change in the start storage number. On the other hand, since the second sub display unit 94 of the sub information display device 90 is in the standby period, the display indicating 3 which is the display before the change of the number of starting memories is maintained, and a new second Even if start memory occurs, the display does not change.

  Then, when the standby period has elapsed, the display of the number of starting memories at that time is performed (t83), and here, the display is such that the second number of starting memories is three. That is, even if there is an increase or decrease in the second start storage, it is displayed that the second start storage number is three. In addition, even if there is a change in the starting memory during the waiting period, a new waiting period is not set, and the display of the actual starting memory number is prevented from being performed over a long period of time .

  FIG. 134 shows the display mode in the example of FIG. 133 (b). As shown in FIGS. 134 (a) and 134 (f), the special view variation display game based on the second starting memory is started from the state where the second starting memory number is shown to be 3 (t81 in FIG. 133). When the second start-up memory number is changed to 2 after being started and the second start-up memory is digested (t82 in FIG. 133), as shown in FIGS. 134 (b) and 134 (c), the second memory display of the display device 41 In the section 83b and the second starting memory number display portion 86b, the display corresponding to the decrease in the starting memory number is immediately performed. Thereafter, when the second start storage is generated and the second start storage number changes to 3 (t84 in FIG. 133), as shown in FIGS. 134 (d) and 134 (e), the second storage display unit of the display device 41 A display corresponding to the increase in the number of start memories is immediately displayed on the display 83b and the second start memory number display 86b.

  On the other hand, in the second sub display unit 94 of the sub information display device 90, as shown in FIG. 134 (f) to (h), even if there is a change in the number of starting memories, as shown in FIG. The display before change is maintained over the waiting period without immediately changing the display in response to the change. Here, after the second starting memory number decreases to 2, it increases to 3 during the waiting period, and the second starting memory number remains in the state indicating 3 on the display. In FIG. 134 (f) to (h), the lighting state is indicated by hatching, and the blinking state is indicated by oblique lines.

  When the number of starting memories changes a plurality of times in a short time such as a waiting period, the decoration display shown in FIGS. 134 (b) and (d) is omitted and only display or deletion of the decoration special view starting memory display You may do it. Also, regardless of the waiting period, as shown in FIG. 134 (b) and (d), if a change in the start memory occurs while the decoration display is being performed according to the change in the start memory, the execution is in progress. It is also possible to cancel the decoration display of and display the decoration according to the change of the new start memory.

  In order to perform such control, display delay processing is performed immediately before step C705 and immediately before step C709 in the sub-information display device control processing shown in FIG. This display delay process is the same process as the process shown in FIG. 127, and the setting of the waiting time for the first sub display unit 93 or the second sub display unit 94 in the effect control device 300 and the setting of the number of display hold Assumed to be performed.

  The configuration of the above-described first modification may be combined. In this case, the standby time for temporarily waiting for the update of the hold display on the collective display unit 50 and the standby time for temporarily waiting for the update of the number of starting storages on the sub information display unit 90 may be the same time. It is good, and it is good also as different time.

  From the above, the variable display game is executed based on the detection of the game ball in the start area (start winning opening 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, common drawing start gate 34), and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result In the case of a gaming machine for giving a predetermined gaming value to the player, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner and the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball in the start area. Starting storage means (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing starting memory to be an execution right up to a predetermined upper limit number together with random number values, and information of starting memory controlled by the game control means and stored in starting storage means It is controlled by start memory display means (collective display device 50), effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game based on the information from the game control means, and effect control means And a sub information display device 90 controlled by the effect control means and displaying information about the game by the light emitter, wherein the effect control means is the start stored in the start storage means When information of storage can be displayed on display device 41 as start storage display and can be displayed using the light emitter of sub information display device 90, and the number of start storage changes several times within a predetermined period In the display device 41, the process of change in the predetermined period is displayed without omission, and in the sub information display device 90, the process of change in the predetermined period is omitted, and the game control means displays the predetermined period. In the case where the number of changes in the number of start-up memories changes a plurality of times, the process of change in the predetermined period is omitted and displayed on the start-up memory display means. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the information of the start memory.

  Also, the configuration of the second modification described above may be combined. In this case, as shown in FIG. 132, the display of the storage display unit 83 or the number-of-starting-memory display portion 86 waits for updating during the update waiting time, and the display of decreasing the starting memory is performed first. A configuration for performing a series of displays for increasing display may be applied as it is.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 135, the storage display unit 83 immediately updates the display according to the change of the number of start memories without waiting for the update of the display, and the start memory number display unit 86 waits for the update of the displays. You may That is, speaking in correspondence with each of FIGS. 133 (a) and 133 (b), the second sub display unit 94 and the second start storage display unit 86b change as shown in the upper row, and the second storage display unit 83 As shown in the lower part, it may be changed immediately. Similar to FIG. 53 (b), the example shown in FIG. 135 is an example in which one second starting memory is generated during the waiting period after one second starting memory is digested as a plurality of changes in the number of starting memories. is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (f), the special view variation display game based on the second start memory is started from the state in which the second start memory number is shown to be three, and the second start When the memory is digested and the second starting memory number is changed to 2, as shown in FIGS. 135 (b) and 135 (c), the second memory display unit 83b of the display device 41 promptly responds to the decrease in the starting memory number. Is displayed. After that, when the second start memory is generated and the second start memory number changes to 3, the second memory display unit 83b of the display device 41 immediately starts the start memory as shown in FIGS. The display is made according to the increase of the number.

  On the other hand, in the second starting memory number display unit 86b of the display device 41, as shown in FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (e), even if there is a change in the starting memory number, the change of the display according to the change is immediately The display before change is maintained over the waiting period without taking place. Here, after the second starting memory number decreases to 2, it increases to 3 during the waiting period, and the second starting memory number remains in the state indicating 3 on the display. Further, in the second sub-display unit 94 of the sub-information display device 90, as shown in FIG. 135 (f) to (h), even if there is a change in the number of start-up memories, the change as shown in FIG. The display before change is maintained over the waiting period without immediately performing the change of the corresponding display. Here, after the second starting memory number decreases to 2, it increases to 3 during the waiting period, and the second starting memory number remains in the state indicating 3 on the display. In FIG. 135 (f) to (h), the lighting state is indicated by hatching, and the blinking state is indicated by oblique lines.

  When such a display is performed, the display of the storage display unit 83 is immediately increased or decreased as the display of the display of the memory display portion 83 in step C 504 in FIG. 130 and in step C 524 in FIG. For the display of the starting memory number display unit 86, the starting memory number display is increased or decreased after a predetermined update waiting time has elapsed, and the display for starting the decoration display is set.

  Also, in step C 653 in FIG. 130 and FIG. 131, the display of the storage display unit 83 is set to display the start of the decoration display as well as increase or decrease of the decoration special display start memory display immediately. With regard to the display of 86, when the update waiting is not in progress, the display set in step C504 or C524 is cancelled, and the display for continuous change is set. As the display for continuous change in this case, when the starting memory number returns to the value at the start of the update standby (when the increase and decrease occur the same number of times), the start memory number display is updated and displayed. No display is set, or the display set in step C 504 or C 524 is merely canceled. That is, the current display is maintained without change. In addition, when the number of starting memories is different from the value at the start of update standby (for example, when starting memories occur continuously), the update display or decoration display for changing the number of starting memories display to the current number of starting memories Set the display to include.

  Note that, contrary to the example in FIG. 135, the start storage number display unit 86 immediately updates the display according to the change in the start storage number without waiting for the display update, and the storage display unit 83 updates the display. You may make it wait. That is, the special view 1 reserve display 54, the special view 2 reserve display 55, the common view reserve display 56, the first storage display unit 83a of the display device 41, the second storage display 83b, the sub information In the case where the first starting memory number display portion 86a, the second starting memory number display portion 86b, the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90 of the display device 90 is provided with a display portion for displaying the common drawing reserve number, For each of the displays in, it is possible to optionally set whether to change the display immediately when there is a change in the number of starting memories, or to wait for a change in display over the waiting period even if there is a change in the number of starting memories is there.

  From the above, the variable display game is executed based on the detection of the game ball in the start area (start winning opening 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, common drawing start gate 34), and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result In the case of a gaming machine for giving a predetermined gaming value to the player, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner and the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball in the start area. Starting storage means (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing starting memory to be an execution right up to a predetermined upper limit number together with random number values, and information of starting memory controlled by the game control means and stored in starting storage means It is controlled by start memory display means (collective display device 50), effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game based on the information from the game control means, and effect control means And a sub information display device 90 controlled by the effect control means and displaying information about the game by the light emitter, wherein the effect control means is the start stored in the start storage means Information of the storage can be displayed on the display device 41 as the start storage display and can be displayed using the light emitter of the sub information display device 90, and the start storage display includes the first display (storage display unit 83) There is a second display (starting memory number display unit 86), each of which is configured to independently display the information of the starting memory of the same content, and the number of starting memories changes several times within a predetermined period. In the first display, the process of change in the predetermined period is displayed without omission, and in the second display and sub information display device 90, the process of change in the predetermined period is omitted and displayed. Means is within a predetermined period When a change in the number of starting memories there are a plurality of times, and it has to be displayed on the start memory display section is omitted the process of changes in the predetermined time period. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the information of the start memory.

  In addition, when there is an increase and a decrease in the start memory within a predetermined period, the effect control means performs the display corresponding to the decrease in the start memory in the first display regardless of the order of change. The display corresponding to the increase will be performed.

  Further, the effect control means is configured to be able to perform a decoration display for decorating the change when the start memory display is changed in the first display along with the increase or decrease of the start memory, and within a predetermined period In the case where the number of changes in the number of start memories is changed a plurality of times, the display of the decoration display in the predetermined period is omitted.

Fourth Modified Example
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modification is capable of executing a plurality of types of specific effects in one special view variable display game.

  As shown in FIG. 136 (a), the specific effect information storage area in the present modified example is the areas 1a to 1d associated with the digest order for each start memory of the first start memory (special figure 1), and First storage area for storing information corresponding to the first specific effect in each of eight areas 2a to 2d associated with the digest order for each start memory of the two start memories (special figure 2) An area 1x-1, x is a to d), and a second storage area (area 1x-2, x is a to d) for storing information corresponding to the second specific effect is provided. Further, two regions are provided so as to correspond to the first specific effect and the second specific effect as well.

  That is, information of two types of specific effects can be stored in one start memory. Thereby, when the execution of each specific effect is determined, the execution content of the specific effect to be executed in each of the special view variation display games to be the target of the specific effect is set in advance, and the execution of each specific effect Content can be managed independently.

  FIG. 136 (b) shows an example in which the countdown notice is set as the first specific effect for the first start memory, and the hold change notice is set as the second specific effect. In this example, when the first start-up memory having the fourth digesting order is generated, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect for the start-up memory as the specific effect is determined. Here, the countdown notice is selected as the first specific effect, and the contents of the notice of the countdown notice in each special view variation display game are determined for the start memory whose target digesting order is the first to the fourth, and specified Information is stored in the first storage area of the first start storage, which is the corresponding area of the effect information storage area.

  Furthermore, the hold change notice is selected as the second specific effect, and the contents of the hold change notice in the special view fluctuation display game are determined for the start storages whose target digestion order is the first to the fourth. The information is stored in a second storage area of the first start storage, which is a corresponding area of the specific effect information storage area. In the second storage area, the target of the hold change notice is specified as “hold 4” whose digest order is the fourth, but this is the start when the digest order is the fourth at the setting of the specific effect It means memory, and does not mean that the start-up memory of the advance notice object is changed when the order of digestion changes as the start-up memory is digested. For example, a unique ID may be attached to each starting memory, and a notice target may be specified by the ID. In addition, when specifying start memory with ID unique to each start memory and managing the specific effect, the specific effect is not managed by the area associated with the digesting order also in the specific effect information storage area, The specific effect may be managed by the area associated with the ID.

  The countdown notice "No display" is set for the first and second first starting memories whose digest order is set, and the hold change notice "hold 4 (one step UP)" is set. Thus, although the countdown notice is not displayed in the special view change display game based on these start memories, the decoration special view start memory display corresponding to the start memory whose digesting order is the fourth when the second specific effect is set The hold change notice is performed to change the state by one step to the high expectation mode.

  In addition, for the first start memory whose digest order is the third, the countdown notice "count 1" is set, and the hold change notice "no change" is set. Thus, in the special view change display game based on the start memory, the decoration special view start memory display is not further changed as the hold change notice, but it is one count before the special view change display game of the notice target as the countdown notice. An effect of displaying “1” indicating that is is executed.

  In addition, for the first start memory having the fourth digestion order, the countdown notice "count 0" is set, and the hold change notice "no change" is set. Thus, in the special view change display game based on the start memory, the decoration special view start memory display is not further changed as the hold change notice, but it is one count before the special view change display game of the notice target as the countdown notice. An effect of displaying “0” indicating that is is executed.

  Each time the special view variation display game to be subjected to the specific effect is started, the information on the first area of the first start-up memory and the information on the first start area of the second start-up memory The information of the area corresponding to the start storage is copied to the active area. At this time, the information of the first storage area is copied to the in-execution area-1, and the information of the second storage area is copied to the in-execution area-2. Further, along with this, the information of the copy source area is erased, and the information of the digestion orders 2 to 4 is carried up one by one.

  In addition, the process of copying the information of the executing area of the specific effect information storage area to the corresponding area (step C534), that is, when the second start memory is generated during the execution of the specific effect for the first start memory In the processing of repeatedly enabling specific effects currently being executed in the special view variable display game based on the second start storage, whether to copy information is selected according to the type of notice. In the example of FIG. 136 (b), there is no problem if the countdown notice is copied and repeatedly executed, but the pending change notice may progress more than planned if it is repeatedly executed. Do not copy.

  In addition, when the second start storage occurs, it may be selected whether or not to copy with reference to the content of the advance notice. Also, for example, the first storage area stores a notice that there is no problem even if it is copied, and the second storage area generates a second start storage assuming that a bad notice (for example, a hold change notice) is copied when copying. At this time, only the information of the first storage area may be copied. Therefore, for example, when only the hold change notice is set as the specific effect, information is not stored in the first storage area, but information is stored only in the second storage area.

  Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of specific effects at the same time, and it is also possible to set another specific effect in a state where the specific effects have already been set. Further, the objects to be notified may be the same or different.

  When the advance targets are different in each specific effect, the final flag is set to the latest start memory which is digested among the start memories for executing the specific effect. Moreover, it is a case where another specific effect is set in the state where the specific effect is already set, and the specific effect to be set later than the start memory which finally executes the specific effect previously set. If the starting memory which finally executes the starting memory is the starting memory to be digested later, the previously set final flag is erased and the final flag is set in the later starting memory. That is, the final flag is set for the starting memory at which all of the series of specific effects end. Furthermore, the final flag corresponding to each specific effect may be set so that the end of each specific effect can be grasped, and the specific effect flag corresponding to each specific effect being executed is also set for the specific effect flag. You may do it.

  Further, in the above description, two types of specific effects can be set for one start memory, but it may be possible to set more types of specific effects. In this case, storage areas are provided for the number of specific effects that can be set for one start storage.

  From the above, the variable display game is executed based on the detection of the game ball in the start winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, common drawing start gate 34), and the result of the variable display game is a special result In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state for giving a predetermined gaming value to the player when it becomes, a predetermined upper limit of the starting memory that becomes the right to execute the variable display game based on the detection of the gaming ball in the starting winning area A game in which the result of the variable display game is determined based on the start storage means (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing up to a number together with random numbers and the random number values stored as start storage in the start storage means The execution means (game control apparatus 100) and the effect that is to be executed in the fluctuation display game that has not been executed yet is an effect that is determined in advance before the start of the fluctuation display game. The effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling an effect is provided, and the effect control means can execute a plurality of types of specific effects in one variation display game, and executes a plurality of types of specific effects. When it is determined to execute the specific effect for each specific effect, the content of execution of the specific effect to be executed in each of the variable display games targeted for the specific effect is set in advance, and each specific effect is This means that the contents of execution are managed independently.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of. Also, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be combined appropriately and applied.

  Further, it should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

18 Frame decoration device (light emission effect device)
41 Display device 44 Board effect device (movable effect device)
46 Panel decoration device (light emitting effect device)
300 Effect control device (effect control means, clock means)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a start condition, and the game results in a special result when the game results in a special result,
A plurality of movable effect member for directing the game by operating,
Providing effect control means for controlling the movable effect member ;
The plurality of movable effect members include a first movable effect member, a second movable effect member, and a third movable effect member.
The first movable effect member and the second movable effect member can operate at the same time,
The second movable effect member and the third movable effect member can operate at the same time,
When the first movable effect member is at the first predetermined position and the third movable effect member is at the second predetermined position, the first movable effect member and the third movable effect member interfere with each other And
The effect control means is
In the effect of simultaneously operating the second movable effect member and the third movable effect member after the first movable effect member performs a predetermined operation,
If the first movable effect member does not exist at the initial position at the timing when the second movable effect member and the third movable effect member start operating, the second movable effect member is caused to start operating as scheduled A game machine characterized by delaying the start of the operation of the third movable effect member until the first movable effect member moves to a position where the first movable effect member does not interfere with the third movable effect member . The effect control means is
A clock means for clocking a time for delaying the start of the operation of the third movable effect member,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the third movable effect member is not operated when the time counted by the clock means exceeds a predetermined value. It is controlled by the above-mentioned production control means, has the display which indicates the production concerning the game,
The effect control means is
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein a specific waiting effect is displayed on the display device during a period in which the start of the operation of the third movable effect member is delayed.

Images